JP6967345B2 - Game equipment - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming device capable of displaying information regarding the gaming of a corresponding gaming machine.

In stores such as pachinko parlors and slot stores, it is common to install gaming devices (information display devices) that can display information about the games of the gaming machines in response to the gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines. Is.

In relation to this, for example, Patent Document 1 describes a game in which personal game information can be managed and personal game information is output to a user terminal owned by the user by using a communication method such as non-contact communication. Equipment is disclosed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-129549

The gaming device disclosed in Patent Document 1 can certainly manage personal game information, but during the execution of the preparatory process when starting the acquisition of personal game information or the acquisition of personal game information. If there is a change in the information about the game during the execution of the preparatory process at the end, there is a risk that the personal game information will not be updated properly.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game device or the like capable of appropriately updating personal game information.

The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above-mentioned problems. In addition, although the description of the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added for reference, the components of the present invention are not limited to those with the reference numerals.

First, regarding the invention relating to the first gaming device,
The invention according to means 1 is
It is equipped with a display means that can display information (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) related to the game of the corresponding game machine (pachinko game machine 1, slot machine 1', etc.), and is equipped with a start operation (information recording start operation: non-). Contact-type communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be accepted, and the start operation can be performed. The information about the game after being accepted can be identifiable and stored as personal game information, and the personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of the update condition according to the game, based on the acceptance of the end operation. , A gaming device (data display device 400, etc.) capable of outputting (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.) information that can identify personal game information (access information to server 980, personal game information, etc.). ,
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the first process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (such as not to update the personal game information), and the update can be performed during the execution of the second process. Update limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) that can limit the updating of personal game information when the conditions are met,
Equipped with
Even when the update of personal game information is restricted by the update limiting means, the information to be displayed on the display means can be updated based on the information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine.
It is a gaming device characterized by this.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Then, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

The invention according to means 2 is
Information (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1', etc.) can be displayed, and the start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication) can be displayed. , Button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be accepted, and after the start operation is accepted. The information related to the game can be identifiable and stored as personal game information, and the personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of the update condition according to the game. Based on the acceptance of the end operation, the personal game It is a gaming device (data display device 400, etc.) capable of outputting (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.) information that can specify information (access information to server 980, personal game information, etc.).
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be restricted (forcibly terminating the process being executed, etc.). Processing limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) and
It is a gaming device characterized by being provided with.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is restricted. , Personal game information can be updated appropriately.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 3,
The gaming device described in means 1.
Even when the update of personal game information is restricted by the update restriction means, the information to be displayed can be updated based on the information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (when the update of the personal game history information is restricted). However, the information to be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 may be updated, etc.).
According to this, even when the update of personal game information is restricted, the player confirms the correct game information by displaying by updating the information to be displayed based on the information about the game of the corresponding game machine. It can be possible.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 4,
The gaming device according to means 1 or 3.
When the update of personal game information is restricted by the update restriction means, the personal game information is released after the update restriction is lifted, using the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine at the time when the processing being executed is started as the reference information. (For example, when the update of the personal game history information is restricted, the personal game history information is updated based on the game information at the time when the preparatory processing during execution is started). It may be configured.
According to this, when the update of the personal game information is restricted, the personal game information is used after the update restriction is lifted, using the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine at the time when the processing being executed is started as the reference information. By updating, it becomes possible to acquire accurate personal game information.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 5,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1, 3 and 4.
When the update of the personal game information is restricted by the update restriction means, the personal game information is provided based on the information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine in the period from the restriction to the release of the update of the personal game information. A gaming device may be configured that further includes a correction means (processing unit 410 or the like) that can be corrected.
According to this, even if the update of the personal game information is restricted, the personal game information is based on the information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine in the period from the restriction to the release of the update of the personal game information. By correcting, it becomes possible to acquire accurate personal game information.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 6,
The gaming device described in means 5, wherein the device is
The correction means is information acquired from the corresponding gaming machine (correction information identifiable from the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 or the like) or information acquired from an external device (correction acquired from the hall computer 600). You may configure a gaming device characterized by correcting the personal gaming information based on the information).
According to this, it is possible to appropriately correct the personal gaming information based on the information acquired from the corresponding gaming machine or the information acquired from the external device.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 7,
The gaming device described in means 2, wherein the device is
When the processing being executed is restricted by the processing restriction means, predetermined notification (display of warning message, sound output, display prompting re-acceptance of operation corresponding to the restricted processing, sound output, etc.) can be executed. A gaming device may be configured that further includes various notification means (liquid crystal display unit 430, sound output unit 450, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to notify the player that the processing being executed is restricted.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 8,
The gaming device described in means 7.
The notification means executes notification for prompting the re-acceptance of the operation corresponding to the restricted processing (display prompting the re-acceptance of the operation corresponding to the restricted processing, sound output, etc.) as the predetermined notification. A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, when the processing being executed is restricted, the player can be urged to perform the operation corresponding to the restricted processing again.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 9,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 8.
It is further provided with an external output processing means (processing unit 410 or the like) capable of executing an external output processing for outputting the latest personal game information to an external device (hall computer 600 or the like) when the end operation is not accepted. The game device may be configured.
According to this, when the end operation is not accepted, the latest personal game information can be output to the external device. As a result, even if the end operation is forgotten, the user can acquire personal game information from an external device.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 10,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 9.
The start operation can be accepted by communication with the user terminal owned by the user.
Notification processing means (processing unit) capable of executing notification processing for notifying an external device (hall computer 600 or the like) of an abnormality in communication with the user terminal when accepting the start operation. A gaming device may be configured that further comprises 410 and the like).
According to this, when an abnormality occurs in the communication with the user terminal when accepting the start operation, it is possible to notify the external device to that effect. As a result, even if the communication fails at the time of the start operation, it is possible to manage the correct personal game information on the external device side.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 11,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10.
The first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, etc.) and
The second display unit (Seg display unit 430, etc.) and
Display control means (processing unit 410, etc.) that controls the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit, and
Further prepare
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern) that displays in conjunction with the first display unit and the second display unit, and the first display unit and the second display unit. With the second display pattern (liquid crystal display independent display pattern, etc.) that displays independently in, it is possible to execute control to display information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine on the first display unit and the second display unit. , Control to display at least a part of the personal game information on the first display unit (data for setting various effects in FIG. 56, etc.).
Of the information displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit, information that can identify the information displayed on the first display unit (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) can be output. (Display, output by non-contact communication, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, for the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit, information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine is displayed by the first display pattern and the second display pattern, thereby providing information on the game. It is possible to enhance the effect of the notification of.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 12,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 11.
Movable parts (Seg display part 440, etc.) and
Based on the timekeeping information (timekeeping information of the clock unit 470, timekeeping information of the hall computer 600, etc.), an operation effect execution means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing an operation effect by operating the movable part, and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, by executing the motion effect by operating the movable part based on the timekeeping information, it is possible to enhance the interest of the notification of the information about the game.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 13,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 12.
Display units (liquid crystal display unit 430, seg display unit 440, etc.) that can display numerical information (pachinko gaming machine 1: number of balls held, slot machine 1': number of medals held, etc.)
The first update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on the update of numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine, and the second update display control based on the update of the numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. Display control means (processing unit 410, etc.) that can execute (subtraction update display control, etc.) and
Further prepare
The display control means has a scroll mode in which the update mode is different between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed (the cycle of updating numerical information is different). Different, different display of progress, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, the first update display control based on the update of the numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine is executed, and the second update is based on the update of the numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. By making the update mode different from that when the display control is executed, the monotonousness of the display mode of the numerical information can be eliminated.

Next, regarding the invention relating to the second gaming device,
The invention according to means 1 is
A gaming device (data display device 400, etc.) capable of displaying information (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1', etc.).
The first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, etc.) by the first display method (liquid crystal display method, EL display method, dot display method, etc.) and
A second display unit (right seg display unit 440A, etc.) using a second display method (seg display method, etc.) different from the first display method, and
Display control means (processing unit 410, etc.) that controls the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit, and
Equipped with
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern) that displays in conjunction with the first display unit and the second display unit, and the first display unit and the second display unit. With the second display pattern (liquid crystal display independent display pattern, etc.) that displays independently in, it is possible to execute control to display information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine on the first display unit and the second display unit. (Data for various production settings in FIG. 56, etc.),
It is a gaming device characterized by this.
According to this, for the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit using different display methods, information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine is displayed by the first display pattern and the second display pattern. , It is possible to enhance the effect of notifying information about the game.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 2,
The gaming device described in means 1.
A third display unit (left segment display unit 440B, etc.) according to the second display method is further provided.
The display control means can execute control to display information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine on the third display unit by the first display pattern and the second display pattern (various effects of FIG. 56). Setting data, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, in addition to the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit, the third display unit having the same display method as the second display unit is based on the first display pattern and the second display pattern. By displaying the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine, the effect of notifying the information about the game can be further enhanced.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 3,
The gaming device according to means 1 or 2.
The display unit based on the second display method can display information by a method having higher visibility from a distance than the first display method (display by 7-segment display, high brightness, wide viewing angle, etc.). A gaming device characterized by the above may be configured.
According to this, not only the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine but also the player who exists at a distant position can visually recognize the information displayed on the second display unit and the third display unit. ..

Further, as an invention relating to the means 4,
The gaming device described in means 2, wherein the device is
The second display unit and the third display unit are rotatable with respect to the display surface constituting the first display unit (the right-segment display unit 440A and the left-segment display unit 440B constitute the liquid crystal display unit 430). It is configured to be rotatable with respect to the display surface, etc.)
At least one of the second display unit and the third display unit is rotatably configured to cover the first display unit (right seg display unit 440A and left seg display unit). At least one display unit of the 440B can rotate so as to cover the liquid crystal display unit 430).
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, the player rotates the information displayed on the display unit so as to cover the first display unit by at least one display unit of the second display unit and the third display unit. It can be made visible.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 5,
The gaming device described in means 2, wherein the device is
The second display unit and the third display unit are configured to be rotatable with respect to the display surface constituting the first display unit (the right seg display unit 440A and the left seg display unit 440B are liquid crystal displays. Rotable with respect to the display surface constituting the unit 430, etc.),
At least one of the second display unit and the third display unit is configured to be rotatable so as to face the side of the corresponding gaming machine (right seg display unit 440A and left seg). At least one display unit of the display unit 440B can be rotated so as to face either the left-right direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1),.
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, by rotating at least one of the display units of the second display unit and the third display unit so as to face the side of the corresponding gaming machine, the information displayed on the display unit is displayed. It can be made visible to surrounding players.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 6,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The second display unit is movably configured to face the side of the corresponding gaming machine (the right seg display unit 440A is movable so as to face the right direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1, etc.). The gaming device may be configured.
According to this, by operating the second display unit so as to face the side of the corresponding gaming machine, the information displayed on the second display unit can be made visible to the surrounding players.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 7,
The gaming device described in means 2, wherein the device is
The second display unit is movably configured to face one side of the corresponding gaming machine (the right seg display unit 440A is movable so as to face the right direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1, etc.).
The third display unit is movably configured to face the other side of the corresponding gaming machine (the left seg display unit 440B is movable so as to face the left direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1, etc.).
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, the second display unit is operated so as to face one side of the corresponding gaming machine, and the third display unit is operated so as to face the other side of the corresponding gaming machine. The information displayed on the display unit can be made visible to the surrounding players in both the left and right directions.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 8,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 7.
The display control means may configure a gaming device characterized in that, in the first display pattern, information regarding the possessed game value owned by the player (number of balls, etc.) is controlled to be displayed. ..
According to this, the information regarding the possessed game value owned by the player can be confirmed by the player by the display linked by the first display unit and the second display unit.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 9,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 8.
The display control means outputs information output from the corresponding gaming machine (information specified from the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 or the like) or output from a predetermined external device (hall computer 600 or the like). It is possible to execute switching control for switching between the first display pattern and the second display pattern based on the information to be displayed (information specified from the display pattern switching signal, etc.).
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to switch the display pattern for displaying the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine based on the information output from the corresponding gaming machine or the information output from the predetermined external device.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 10,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 9.
Further equipped with an operation unit (operation unit 420, etc.)
The display control means can execute switching control for switching between the first display pattern and the second display pattern based on an operation (display pattern switching operation, etc.) for the operation unit.
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to switch the display pattern for displaying the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine based on the operation for the operation unit.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 11,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10.
Start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording type end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) Is possible, information about the game after accepting the start operation can be identifiable and stored as personal game information, and personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of update conditions according to the game. Based on the acceptance of the end operation, it is possible to output information that can identify personal game information (access information to server 980, personal game information, etc.) (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.).
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the first process and the second process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (such as not to update the personal game information). ) Update limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Then, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 12,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10.
Start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording type end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) Is possible, information about the game after accepting the start operation can be identifiable and stored as personal game information, and personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of update conditions according to the game. Based on the acceptance of the termination operation, it is possible to output information (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) that can identify personal game information (two-dimensional code, non-contact communication, etc.).
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be restricted (forcibly terminating the process being executed, etc.). Processing limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is restricted. , Personal game information can be updated appropriately.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 13,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 12.
The first display unit can display numerical information (pachinko gaming machine: number of balls held, slot machine: number of medals held, etc.).
The display control means is used for first update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on the update of numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine, and for updating numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. Based on the second update display control (subtraction update display control, etc.), the update mode is different depending on whether the first update display control is executed or the second update display control is executed (the update mode is different). Different cycles of updating numerical information, different scrolling modes, different display of progress, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, the first update display control based on the update of the numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine is executed, and the second update is based on the update of the numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. By making the update mode different from that when the display control is executed, the monotonousness of the display mode of the numerical information can be eliminated.

Further, as an invention relating to the above means,
Operate the second display unit (rotate the right door unit 403A to operate the right seg display unit 440A) based on the time measurement information (timekeeping information of the clock unit 470, time measurement information of the hall computer 600, etc.). A gaming device may be further provided with an operation effect executing means (processing unit 410, door rotation control unit 445, etc.) capable of executing the operation effect according to the above.
According to this, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by executing the operation effect by operating the second display unit based on the timekeeping information.

Further, as an invention relating to the above means,
The motion effect executing means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the motion effect can be executed by a plurality of modes (various effect setting data and the like in FIG. 56).
According to this, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by executing the operation effect in a plurality of modes.

Further, as an invention relating to the above means,
A light emitting unit (light emitting unit 480, etc.) corresponding to the second display unit is further provided.
The motion effect executing means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the motion effect can execute a light emission effect (light emission effect, irradiation effect, etc.) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect by executing the light emission effect of causing the light emitting unit to emit light in the operation effect.

Further, as an invention relating to the above means,
The second display unit and the third display unit are operated (the right door unit 403A and the left door unit 403B are rotated) based on the time measurement information (the time information of the clock unit 470, the time information of the hall computer 600, etc.). The game is further provided with an operation effect executing means (processing unit 410, door rotation control unit 445, etc.) capable of executing an operation effect by (operating the right seg display unit 440A and the left seg display unit 440B). The device may be configured.
According to this, by executing the operation effect by operating the second display unit and the third display unit based on the timekeeping information, it is possible to enhance the interest of the notification of the information related to the game.

Further, as an invention relating to the above means,
The motion effect executing means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the motion effect can be executed by a plurality of modes (various effect setting data and the like in FIG. 56).
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest by executing the motion effect in a plurality of modes.

Further, as an invention relating to the above means,
A light emitting unit (second display area LED unit 482, etc.) corresponding to each of the second display unit and the third display unit is further provided.
The motion effect executing means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the motion effect can execute a light emission effect (light emission effect, irradiation effect, etc.) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light.
According to this, by executing the light emitting effect of causing the light emitting unit corresponding to each of the second display unit and the third display unit to emit light in the operation effect, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the notification of the information related to the game.

Next, regarding the invention relating to the third gaming device,
The invention according to means 1 is
A gaming device (data display device 400, etc.) capable of displaying information (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1', etc.).
Movable parts (Seg display part 440, etc.) and
Based on the timekeeping information (timekeeping information of the clock unit 470, timekeeping information of the hall computer 600, etc.), an operation effect execution means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing an operation effect by operating the movable part, and
It is a gaming device characterized by being provided with.
According to this, by executing the motion effect by operating the movable part based on the timekeeping information, it is possible to enhance the interest of the notification of the information about the game.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 2,
The gaming device described in means 1.
The motion effect executing means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the motion effect can be executed by a plurality of modes (various effect setting data and the like in FIG. 56).
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest by executing the motion effect in a plurality of modes.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 3,
The gaming device described in means 2, wherein the device is
Further equipped with a light emitting unit (light emitting unit 480, etc.)
The motion effect executing means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the motion effect can execute a light emission effect (light emission effect, irradiation effect, etc.) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest by executing the light emitting effect of causing the light emitting unit to emit light in the operation effect.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 4,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The operation effect executing means is based on a game machine signal output from the corresponding game machine (a jackpot signal output from the pachinko game machine 1 or the like) or a game value owned by the player (number of balls or the like). A gaming device characterized in that the operation effect can be executed may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest by executing the motion effect based on the game machine output from the corresponding game machine or the possessed game value owned by the player.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 5,
The gaming device described in means 4, wherein the device is
The operation effect executing means is
A first operation effect executing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of selectively executing an operation effect based on the timekeeping information and an operation effect based on the gaming machine signal, and
A second motion effect execution means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of selectively executing the motion effect based on the timekeeping information and the motion effect based on the possessed game value, and
Have,
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to preferentially execute either the motion effect based on the timekeeping information or the motion effect based on the gaming machine signal. In addition, it is possible to preferentially execute either the motion effect based on the timekeeping information or the motion effect based on the possessed game value.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 6,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 5.
A gaming device may be further provided with a setting means (processing unit 410 or the like) capable of setting the operation effect.
According to this, the store side and the player side can make settings related to the operation effect.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 7,
The gaming device described in means 6, wherein the device is
The setting means may configure a gaming device characterized in that it is possible to set whether or not the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means.
According to this, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the operation effect.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 8,
The gaming device according to means 6 or 7.
The setting means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the timing of execution of the motion effect by the motion effect execution means can be set.
According to this, it is possible to set which timing to execute the operation effect.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 9,
The gaming device according to any one of means 6 to 8.
The setting means may configure a gaming device characterized in that the mode of execution of the motion effect by the motion effect execution means can be set.
According to this, it is possible to set in what mode the motion effect is executed.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 10,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 9.
The first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, etc.) by the first display method (liquid crystal display method, EL display method, dot display method, etc.) and
A second display unit (right seg display unit 440A, etc.) using a second display method (seg display method, etc.) different from the first display method, and
Display control means (processing unit 410, etc.) that controls the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit, and
Further prepare
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern) that displays in conjunction with the first display unit and the second display unit, and the first display unit and the second display unit. With the second display pattern (liquid crystal display independent display pattern, etc.) that displays independently in, it is possible to execute control to display information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine on the first display unit and the second display unit. (Data for various production settings in FIG. 56, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, for the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit using different display methods, information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine is displayed by the first display pattern and the second display pattern. , It is possible to enhance the effect of notifying information about the game.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 11,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10.
Information (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) related to the game of the corresponding game machine (pachinko game machine 1, slot machine 1', etc.) can be displayed, and the start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication) can be displayed. , Button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be accepted, and after the start operation is accepted. The information related to the game can be identifiable and stored as personal game information, and the personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of the update condition according to the game. Based on the acceptance of the end operation, the personal game Information that can identify information (access information to server 980, personal game information, etc.) can be output (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.).
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the first process and the second process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (such as not to update the personal game information). ) Update limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Then, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 12,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10.
Information (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) related to the game of the corresponding game machine (pachinko game machine 1, slot machine 1', etc.) can be displayed, and the start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication) can be displayed. , Button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be accepted, and after the start operation is accepted. The information related to the game can be identifiable and stored as personal game information, and the personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of the update condition according to the game. Based on the acceptance of the end operation, the personal game Information that can identify information (access information to server 980, personal game information, etc.) can be output (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.).
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be restricted (forcibly terminating the process being executed, etc.). Processing limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is restricted. , Personal game information can be updated appropriately.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 13,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 12.
A display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, seg display unit 440, etc.) that can display numerical information (pachinko gaming machine: number of balls, slot machine: number of medals, etc.),
The first update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on the update of numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine, and the second update display control based on the update of the numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. Display control means (processing unit 410, etc.) that can execute (subtraction update display control, etc.) and
Further prepare
The display control means has a scroll mode in which the update mode is different between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed (the cycle of updating numerical information is different). Different, different display of progress, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, the first update display control based on the update of the numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine is executed, and the second update is based on the update of the numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. By making the update mode different from that when the display control is executed, the monotonousness of the display mode of the numerical information can be eliminated.

Next, regarding the invention relating to the fourth gaming device,
The invention according to means 1 is
It is a gaming device (data display device 400, etc.) provided corresponding to a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1', etc.).
A display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, seg display unit 440, etc.) that can display numerical information (pachinko gaming machine: number of balls, slot machine: number of medals, etc.),
The first update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on the update of numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine, and the second update display control based on the update of the numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. Display control means (processing unit 410, etc.) that can execute (subtraction update display control, etc.) and
Equipped with
The display control means has a scroll mode in which the update mode is different between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed (the cycle of updating numerical information is different). Different, different display of progress, etc.),
It is a gaming device characterized by this.
According to this, the first update display control based on the update of the numerical information that is beneficial to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine is executed, and the second update is based on the update of the numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. By making the update mode different from that when the display control is executed, the monotonousness of the display mode of the numerical information can be eliminated.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 2,
The gaming device described in means 1.
When the numerical information to be updated is a plurality of numerical values, the display control means updates the first update display control and the second update display control. Different aspects,
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, the effect of notifying the numerical information can be enhanced by making the mode of updating different between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 3,
The gaming device described in means 2, wherein the device is
The display control means causes the display unit to display the progress of updating the numerical information when the first update display control is executed, but updates the numerical information when the second update display control is executed. Do not display the progress of
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, when the first update display control is executed, the progress of updating the numerical information is displayed, but when the second update display control is executed, the progress of updating the numerical information is not displayed. By setting this, the monotonousness of the display mode of the numerical information can be eliminated.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 4,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The display control means updates depending on whether the first update display control is executed or the second update display control is executed when the numerical information of the update destination is numerical information corresponding to the same numerical value. Different aspects of
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, when the numerical information of the update destination is the numerical information corresponding to the same numerical value, the mode of update is determined depending on whether the first update display control is executed or the second update display control is executed. By making them different, the monotonousness of the display mode of the numerical information can be eliminated.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 5,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The display control means uses the specific value information regarding the specific value associated with the game of the player on the corresponding gaming machine as the numerical information.
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the specific value information regarding the specific value associated with the player's game on the corresponding gaming machine as numerical information.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 6,
The gaming device described in means 5, wherein the device is
The gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a gaming value is given to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display control means uses information on the granted game value (number of balls, number of medals, etc.) given to the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine as the specific value information.
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the information regarding the given game value given to the player playing the game with the corresponding game machine as the specific value information.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 7,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, etc.) by the first display method (liquid crystal display method, EL display method, dot display method, etc.) and
A second display unit (right seg display unit 440A, etc.) using a second display method (seg display method, etc.) different from the first display method, and
Display control means (processing unit 410, etc.) that controls the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit, and
Further prepare
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern) that displays in conjunction with the first display unit and the second display unit, and the first display unit and the second display unit. With the second display pattern (liquid crystal display independent display pattern, etc.) that displays independently in, it is possible to execute control to display information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine on the first display unit and the second display unit. (Data for various production settings in FIG. 56, etc.),
A gaming device characterized by this may be configured.
According to this, in addition to the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit, the third display unit having the same display method as the second display unit is based on the first display pattern and the second display pattern. By displaying the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the effect of notifying the information about the game.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 8,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 7.
Information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) And end operations (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be accepted, and information related to the game after accepting the start operation can be specified as personal game information. Information that can be memorized, personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of update conditions according to the game, and personal game information can be specified based on the acceptance of the end operation (access to server 980). Information, personal game information, etc.) can be output,
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the first process and the second process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (such as not to update the personal game information). ) Update limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Then, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 9,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 7.
Information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls, etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) And end operations (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be accepted, and information related to the game after accepting the start operation can be specified as personal game information. Information that can be memorized, personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of update conditions according to the game, and personal game information can be specified based on the acceptance of the end operation (access to server 980). Information, personal game information, etc.) can be output,
A first processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first processing (information recording start preparation processing, etc.) based on the start operation, and
A second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be restricted (forcibly terminating the process being executed, etc.). Processing limiting means (processing unit 410, etc.) and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first process based on the start operation or the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is restricted. , Personal game information can be updated appropriately.

Further, as an invention relating to the means 10,
The gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 9.
Information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine can be displayed,
Movable parts (Seg display part 440, etc.) and
Based on the timekeeping information (timekeeping information of the clock unit 470, timekeeping information of the hall computer 600, etc.), an operation effect execution means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing an operation effect by operating the movable part, and
A gaming device may be configured that further comprises.
According to this, by executing the motion effect by operating the movable part based on the timekeeping information, it is possible to enhance the interest of the notification of the information about the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the functional structure of a gaming machine. It is a rear view of a gaming machine. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the accessory ratio display device, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. .. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the connection ratio / combination ratio related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the connection ratio / combination ratio display control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls of a bonus, and the number of balls acquired of a continuous bonus. (A) to (D) are front views which simplified the modification of the main board. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration of the 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of a signal and information in the 1st gaming system. It is a figure which shows an example of the outer end output of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional structure of the inter-unit counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional structure of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the display content setting table. It is explanatory drawing of the index value. It is explanatory drawing of a reference index value. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the display mode setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data for each display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data by special display. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for special display setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for setting the payout rate suitability information display. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the model information setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the device correspondence table. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the display device setting data. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional structure of a ball management computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance configuration of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional structure of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the payout rate aggregate data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a management process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a data display device processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the payout rate actual measurement value calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the payout rate suitability information display control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the system structure of the 2nd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of a signal and information in the 2nd gaming system. It is a figure which shows an example of the appearance configuration of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing mode of the door part of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing mode of the door part of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing mode of the door part of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the eaves. It is a figure which shows another example of the eaves. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional structure of a data display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for recording personal game history information. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hard disk of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the opening / closing mode setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the operation effect setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data for setting of various operation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the table composition of the table for setting an irradiation effect. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of an irradiation effect. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of an irradiation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display device setting data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of operation effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of an irradiation effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of personal game history information recording processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the process during the first update. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the process during the second update. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the numerical information display processing. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of display update of numerical information. It is explanatory drawing of another example of the individual game history record. It is a figure which shows an example of the system structure of the 3rd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of a signal and information in the 3rd game system. It is a front view of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional structure of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a card unit processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display part of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game machine signal output from a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the opening / closing timing setting table. It is a figure which shows another example of an irradiation effect. It is a figure which shows another example of an irradiation effect. It is a figure which shows another example of the signal which a game machine outputs.

Hereinafter, an example of a suitable embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. However, the embodiments to which the present invention is applicable are not limited to the embodiments described below.

[1. First Embodiment]
First, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described.
In pachinko gaming machines, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared with the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area where the variable display of the special symbol is executed by the entry of the game medium. Is low. Further, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but in this advantageous state, the game medium enters the specific winning area where the game medium can enter. Compared to the approach, the interest of the player is low, and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Due to such circumstances, the game nails may be maintained on the store side so that it is substantially difficult for the game medium to enter the general winning area.

However, on the gaming machine maker side, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is desirable that the store should be in a maintenance state of the game nails so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Needs to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general prize area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general prize area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room to further enhance the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine having a general winning area. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[1-1. Configuration of pachinko game machines]
FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “gaming machine 1”) in the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. Further, FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (meter board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. Further, the gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 3a formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable.

The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area 10 from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and is driven into the game area 10. Further, the game area 10 is composed of a left game area 10A and a right game area 10B. The game area 10 is an area through which the game ball can pass in the game board 2, and the left side is the left game area 10A and the right side is the right game area 10B with respect to the center of the game area 10.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in the figure, on the right side of the game area 10). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. Not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". .. The number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. In the decorative symbol display area, which is a variable display unit divided into a plurality of, for example, three, the decorative symbol, which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified by each, is variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, "left" corresponds to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , "Middle", and "Right", each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to change the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. The derivation display of the display result means that the identification information such as the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) to end the variable display.

In the image display device 5, as display areas to be the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so as to be bonded or separated, or to be bonded and separated. .. The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the image display device 5 executes the effect display along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters. There are numbers "1" to "eight", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters or symbols and a character image, and the like. Is composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure.). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs composed of the characters "abrupt") and blank symbols that correspond to "probability jackpot" (also referred to as "2R probability variable jackpot") and blank symbols are available. (Symbols that do not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

During the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, the symbol numbers are sequentially changed from the smaller one to the larger one from the upper side to the lower side. A flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left"), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative symbol with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol with the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

At the lower right of the display screen of the image display device 5, fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B for displaying the fourth symbol following the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed for the first special figure. The fourth symbol display area 5A of the above and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol are performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A fourth symbol display area 5B for two special figures is provided.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variable display of the decorative symbol is a variable pattern designation command on the effect control CPU 120 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the above.) When performing the effect using the image display device 5, for example, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as being performed or a production in which a movable object shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, whether or not the state is currently in the variable display by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Is surely recognizable. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always variably displayed by a constant operation and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 5A and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 5B for a figure may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

In the variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B have a predetermined display color (for example, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is the second. 4 The symbol display area 5B is black), and is realized by continuing a blinking state in which lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol. Synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missing symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missing symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

A start winning memory display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display is performed. Here, the hold of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B (starting winning). do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the game machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be played.

As an example, the start winning memory display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. There is. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display parts in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the embodiment is changed to a red display. After that, when either the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) or the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is satisfied, for example. The display in the leftmost display area is removed, and the display in each display area is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to the blue display or the red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a start prize is generated, display control is performed in the start prize storage display area 5H to newly display the hold information corresponding to the special figure game executed based on the start prize. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start condition is satisfied). If a new start prize is generated when n hold information is displayed (when n special figure games are held), the n + 1th hold information from the left corresponds to the new start prize. Will be newly displayed. Then, when the start condition of the reserved special figure game is satisfied, the leftmost reserved information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) reserved information from the left is left one by one. It will be shifted to and displayed in the n-1st position.

The order in which the start conditions of the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions occur, and the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure is higher than the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 4 priority change). On the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure is satisfied with priority over the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority change). You can do it.

In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the player or the like may be able to recognize the special figure reserved memory number by displaying a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H. For example, along with the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the first hold display 25A and the first hold display 25A for identifiablely displaying the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. 2 Hold display 25B is provided. The first hold indicator 25A identifiablely displays the first hold storage number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. The second hold indicator 25B identifiablely displays the second hold storage number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B have, for example, the number (for example, 4) LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values (for example, "4") in each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, respectively. Is configured to include. Further, a movable accessory 150 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The movable accessory 150 has a built-in motor and a lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 150 is adapted to operate (rotate operation and lighting) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a variation result advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect described later is executed.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normally open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 27 for an ordinary electric accessory. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory, so-called electric chew) and forms a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball does not enter or enters the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is on. It becomes an easy expansion and opening state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 28 for the large winning opening door, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. .. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening when the solenoid 28 for the large winning opening door is in the off state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 28 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, the game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the like. When the start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1. The added value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be the total reserved storage number or the special figure reserved storage number.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal design (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). The ordinary symbol display 20 variably displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols composed of, for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". The ordinary symbol display 20 is not limited to a variable display of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. as ordinary symbols, for example, "○" and "×". Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the indicated decorative lamps (or LEDs) or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gates 41A and 41B.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 50A to 50D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. There is a winning area.

The general winning openings 50A to 50D are composed of a ball receiving member projecting forward (on the player side) from the surface of the game board. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are not connected in the horizontal direction and pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the distance between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning openings 50A to 50D is such that at least one game ball can pass through. Further, a winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the openings of the general winning openings 50A to 50D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B for switching the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening) is provided. It is always open. Further, even if the game ball wins in the general winning openings 50A to 50D, neither the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game nor the start condition of the variable display of the normal figure game is satisfied based on the winning.

In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening, but the general prize is not limited to this. With the winning of the game ball in the mouth, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B for controlling the opening / closing of the second starting winning opening and a special variable winning for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening. Activating the ball device 7 to facilitate the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening or the large winning opening may be set as a specific value given by the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

Further, the specific value given to the player may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C, 5 Each prize ball is given, but if a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D, ten prize balls are given (that is, specific values of different sizes are given. It may be granted). Further, the specific value given when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is a predetermined number of prize balls, but the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening. When the game ball wins in 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

Further, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. For example, the winning ball may be executed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Is given, and the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the type of specific value is different), so that different effects are executed. Is also good. In addition, there are cases where 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and 5 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. (That is, when the magnitude of the specific value is different), different effects may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the winning of the game ball to the first general winning opening 50A, the second general winning opening 50B, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening 50D is the first general winning opening corresponding to each. It is detected by the mouth switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. When a game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls Is paid out as a prize ball.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball is won in the general winning opening in the game control microcomputer 100 by providing the winning opening switch corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 50A to 50D. Not only that, it is also possible to detect which general winning opening the game ball has won.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left game area 10A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B. , A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the right game area 10B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. You can do it. In addition, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that one of the general winning openings has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. You may be able to do it.

At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. The game ball taken into the out port is collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) connecting to the out port. The game balls that have won in each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball set gutter (not shown) and are balls. It is designed to be collected on the game island via the collection passage. An out-ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, the game ball driven into the game area 10 (the game ball guided to the out opening without winning any winning opening, and the winning ball set by winning any winning opening. Game balls collected in the gutter) Detects all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control CPU 120 totals the number of game balls driven into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the value of the counter increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The number of outs may be aggregated in a fixed number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 120 side by outputting a signal for increasing the number of outs to the board 12.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided around the gaming area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the gaming machine 1.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper plate 60 that holds (stores) a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine so that it can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. It is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by a player by a pressing operation or the like is installed at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 60.

A keyway 61 is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60. The store clerk inserts the key into the keyway 61 to open the locking device (not shown), and uses the hinge mechanism to open and close the glass door frame 3a with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. It is possible to make it. By opening the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, maintenance of the gaming board (meter board including game nails and winning openings) 2 (for example, measures to eliminate ball jams) and The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32, which will be described later, can be operated.

Immediately below the upper plate 60, a lower plate 62 for storing a game ball that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 60 is provided, and in the lower right of the upper plate 60, the game ball as a game medium is directed toward the game area. A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 63 operated by a player or the like for firing is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle 63 adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor included in the hitting ball launching device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and is rotatable. The operation button 30 is not limited to a push operation or a rotation operation, and may be a touch operation or a pressing operation such as a touch panel, or a tilting operation such as a lever type switch. It may be operable, or it may be capable of pushing operation and tilting operation such as a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 may be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 30 is a push detection switch (not shown) for detecting the pressing of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder (not shown) for detecting the rotation direction and rotation amount of the operation button (jog dial) 30. Not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the game machine 1 will be schematically described.
In the game machine 1, the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 41A provided in the left gaming area 10A and the second passing gate 41B provided in the right gaming area 10B is the first gate corresponding to the first passing gate 41A. For example, after the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20, such as the detection by the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the switch 21A and the second passage gate 41B, is satisfied. Based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol such as the end of the previous normal symbol game is satisfied, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (deriving display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "hit the normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. However, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. In the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started and the predetermined time that becomes the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol Derived display of the confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol (missing symbol) other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". ". The specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as the definite special symbol is different depending on the type of the jackpot. For example, the definite special symbol is different between the probable variable jackpot and the non-probable variable jackpot. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (simply also referred to as a "round") is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the jackpot game state controlled after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 7 is a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number as the first period. By opening the large winning opening in the period until (for example, 9) winning balls are generated, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. NS. In this way, the opening / closing plate with the large winning opening open during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. 7 is changed to a second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the big hit game state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. It should be noted that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round game executions may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, as one of the advantageous states advantageous for the player, the time reduction control in which the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state is It is controlled to the time saving state to be executed and the probabilistic state in which the probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time shortening control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a game state different from a specific state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and is an initial setting state of the game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). As described above, the same control as in the state where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on is performed. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when either of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is satisfied first. Then, just finish. In addition, in the probabilistic state, in the variable display of each special figure game and decorative symbol, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state. improves. Such a probabilistic state continues until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" or until a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of the special figure game is executed.

Jackpot A jackpot (type) that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the game state ends is also referred to as a probabilistic jackpot. The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the time-saving state without being controlled to the probability-changing state after the jackpot gaming state ends is also called a non-probability-changing jackpot.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal", and control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "per normal". The second start condition is to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Controls that are advantageous to the player are performed by increasing the possibility of being established. In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player, is also referred to as a high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. The state in which the high opening control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state in which the high opening control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is used. , Of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special symbol game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which fluctuations continue, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) in advance. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the display state where the decorative symbol is fluctuating in the symbol display area 5C, etc.), or in all or part of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", the decorative symbol is a big hit. It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or a part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back a moving image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). For the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are brought into the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in the present embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are preset. Then, when the reach mode of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the reach mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the symbol, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. In the present embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo-ream" and "slip" can be executed, and whether each effect operation is executed in response to the determination of the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Whether or not it is decided.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream" or "slip", the decorative image such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image is displayed. Notify the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state or the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect for doing so may be executed.

When the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The definite decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination of is sometimes displayed as a stop. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "reachless loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, the definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach loss combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". The definite decoration symbol that is a non-reach combination and the definite decoration symbol that is a reach loss combination are collectively referred to as a definite decoration symbol that is a loss combination (non-specific combination).

When the special symbol that is the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. Later, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, as for the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 is "1". Any one of the decorative symbols from "8" is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Anything is fine.

In addition, after the decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the look-ahead that announces and notifies that the pending data whose special symbol display result is "big hit" is stored during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state is pre-reading. The advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 10 is composed of the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) to adjust the left game area 10A. It is possible to switch between a left-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right side and a right-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right game area 10B.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball is launched into the left game area 10A (when the game ball enters the left game area 10A), the right game area 10B is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game ball is designed to win a prize in the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired. In addition, when the gaming state is in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is longer than when the gaming state is in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". Since the probability of becoming a player is low, the rate at which the game ball launched into the left game area 10A in the normal state wins the second start winning slot is extremely low compared to the rate at which the game ball wins the first starting winning slot. There is.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball is launched into the right gaming area 10B (when the gaming ball enters the right gaming area 10B), the left gaming is performed by arranging a gaming nail or a gaming ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where the game ball is fired in the area 10A, the rate at which the game ball wins in the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win in the first starting winning opening. .. Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the ratio of the game ball winning the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is left-handed in the normal state. Occasionally, the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is extremely low. Therefore, the player will hit left in the normal state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched into the right game area 10B passing through the second passage gate 41B is such that the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is the first due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-passage gate 41A. The rate at which the game ball fired in the right game area 10B wins in the second start winning opening in the open state is the game fired in the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second starting winning opening in the open state.

Then, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol hit" is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting right in the probable change state and the time saving state is left in the probable changing state and the time saving state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the ball is hit. Therefore, the player will hit right in the probable change state and the time saving state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball fired in the right game area 10B to the large winning opening in the open state is that the game ball fired in the left game area 10A is due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of winning a prize in the open large prize opening. Therefore, the player will hit right in the big hit game state. In this way, the player strikes left in the normal state, switches to right-handed when the big hit game state occurs, continues right-handed in the probable change state or time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the probability change state without the big hit game state or the time saving state), it will be returned to the left-handed.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched in the left game area 10A to the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B provided in the left gaming area 10A is the ratio of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50A. The game ball launched into the right game area 10B due to the position where the general winning opening 50B is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) is the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball launched in the right game area 10B to the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D provided in the right game area 10B is the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth. The game ball launched into the left game area 10A due to the position where the general winning opening 50D is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) is the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50D.

For some or all of the plurality of general winning openings (first general winning opening 50A and second general winning opening 50B) provided in the left game area 10A, only the game ball fired in the left game area 10A It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball fired in the right game area 10B may be configured not to win a prize, and a plurality of general prize openings (3rd general prize opening 50C and 4th general prize opening) provided in the right game area 10B may be used. For a part or all of 50D), only the game ball fired in the right game area 10B can win a prize, and the game ball fired in the left game area 10C may not win a prize.

In this way, since left-handed is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B among the four general winning openings, and the jackpot gaming state and In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, right-handed hitting is performed, so that there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D among the four general winning openings. As the game area in which the game ball is launched changes according to the game state and the like, the general winning opening where the game ball is likely to win also changes. In the left game area 10A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability change state, and the time saving state. In the area 10B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening may change depending on the game state.

The gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the game machine 1. The payout control board is a board for controlling the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is composed of a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to reception of a prize ball number command (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11) in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set. The payout mechanism (the mechanism for paying out the prize balls) is driven to execute the payout of the prize balls.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function. On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

Further, the switch circuit 110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (details will be described later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. Although the details will be described later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting the abnormality generated in the gaming machine 1.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, and receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 to receive an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. And various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the electric component for effect such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 produces effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It is equipped with a function to determine the control content for causing a predetermined effect operation to be performed on the electric component for use.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes voice signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives it.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 has a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning port switch 24A. , The wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D is connected.

The first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D are, for example, Any device having an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor, may be used. Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the normal figure hold display 25C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. Further, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with, for example, a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and blocks the input of the signal from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of the effect control board 12 or the relay board 15 to the side of the main board 11.

The relay board 15 may be provided with, for example, a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In each transmission direction regulation circuit, the anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11, and the cathode is connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 12, and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode. The other end is composed of a resistor connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulation circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the effect control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In the present embodiment, a transmission direction regulation circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal on the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing it, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It contains lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

Such effect control commands include, for example, a game state specification command for designating a game state (normal state, probability change state, or time saving state), a variation start command for specifying a variation start in a special figure game, and a special in a special figure game. A variable pattern specification command that specifies a variation time of a symbol or a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol in the image display device 5, a variable display result notification command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol in the image display device 5. A decorative symbol stop command that specifies the stop of the variable display of, a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start or end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot end designation command, and a game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The start winning command that is output when, the general winning opening designation command that is output when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the big winning opening winning command that is output when the game ball wins in the big winning opening, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. RA (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates of numerical data indicating random values independently of CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 10 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And transmission operation to output various signals is also performed.

As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 (or the CPU 103) executes the game control computer 100 (or the CPU 103). (Or perform processing), specifically, the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. This also applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board different from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124 and the I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data read operation to read various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illuminated signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 150, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 12, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation button 30 has been detected is transmitted from a push detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 31 described later, and operation in the display changeover switch 32 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the unit (first position or second position) is also connected.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an image display device 5, a speaker 8L, 8R, a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, an operation button 30, a movable accessory 150, and an effect accessory. In order to control the effect operation using the effect device (electrical component for effect) including the movable member provided in the above, a plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 123 is for executing various effect displays such as variable display of decorative patterns and effect display in reach effect by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. To control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 31. Includes an input port for capturing various signals such as a enable signal and a signal for confirming the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14. A command (drive signal) or the like to be transmitted to the movable accessory 150 is output, such as an (illuminated signal) or the like.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data shown in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate a voice or a sound effect. The stored data in the voice data ROM may be composed of data showing the output mode of voice and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

For example, an input / output driver, a lamp driver, and the like are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the illumination signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the game machine 1, the generated abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13, or through the lamp control board 14. The lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED is controlled to notify by light, or an abnormal notification image (error message) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123. I will notify you. Examples of the abnormality include a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, which are detected by using the abnormality detection sensor group 26 or the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality generated in the gaming machine 1. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to the sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 may be configured to detect an abnormality. One or more sensors and the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 are prepared according to each type of abnormality. The specific content of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 may be determined by the specifications of the gaming machine 1 or the like. Abnormalities that occur in the gaming machine 1 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games performed in the gaming machine 1 (for example, magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, and radio wave abnormalities that occur when there is an illegal act on the gaming machine 1). Phenomena such as) and phenomena that can hinder the progress of the game, and in particular, phenomena that require notification to players and employees of the game hall (pachinko shops, etc.).

Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.). For example, these sensors and the like may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. A known method can be appropriately used for detecting the abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, etc. based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26, an abnormality detection designation command for specifying that an abnormality has occurred is a main board. It is transmitted from 11 to the effect control board 12, and the abnormality has occurred due to the display of the error message in the image display device 5, the output of the warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode when the abnormality occurs in the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Notification is performed.

Here, not only the abnormality has occurred due to the notification means such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, but also any of the types of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and opening of the front door. It may be possible to notify identifiable whether or not an abnormality has been detected.

The magnetic anomaly notification is an abnormality notification performed when a magnetic anomaly (an abnormality that a magnet is in the vicinity of the gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. There are fraudulent acts such as moving the game medium with a magnet to make the winning opening win a prize, or clogging a predetermined area with the game medium to guide the game medium to the winning opening. Notification of a magnetic anomaly prevents such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 103 determines the presence or absence of a magnetic anomaly by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor exhibits a magnetic force equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (indicating a magnetic force → having a magnetic anomaly). When a magnetic anomaly is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the magnetic anomaly. For example, an image with the characters "A magnetic error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a special variable winning ball device 7. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking the pachinko gaming machine to change the flow direction of the game medium toward the winning opening such as the large winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality (vibration abnormality) due to vibration by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (strongness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold). Shows vibration → There is vibration abnormality). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the vibration abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A vibration error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

The radio wave abnormality notification is an abnormality notification performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switch (1st start port switch 22A and 2nd start port switch 22B), the count switch 23, etc., these switches can be switched on / off to illegally generate a prize and win a prize ball. There is cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.) is provided. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of the predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the radio wave abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A radio wave error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

Both the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and are provided outside the game area of the game board 2. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 configured by the DIP switch switch the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of the slide type, the position of the knob is set to one end side and the other end). By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, the glass door frame 3a covers the front surface of the game board 2, so that the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32. It has become. In the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32, when the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1), the player can use the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 via the glass door frame 3a. It is not shown in FIG. 1 because it is installed in an invisible position.

As described above, the store clerk inserts the key into the keyway 61, opens the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 to play the game. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 provided on the board 2 can be operated (dIP switch changeover). Then, when the operations of the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, the key is inserted into the keyway 61, and the locking device (shown). ) Is closed.

When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 120 is set to High. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 has the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 has information for the player (for example, a demo). It is specified that the game mode is to display the screen, etc.), and the information of the winning number management table, which will be described later, is not displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 is in the second position, that is, the information for the clerk in the image display device 5 (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying the number of winnings to each winning opening, and the information of the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 120 is set to High. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 is informed of the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that the display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display the information based on the display control table (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 wins a prize in the general winning opening. It is specified that the permission to display the number is given, and the information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is permitted to be displayed on the image display device 5. do.

In the present embodiment, the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are provided on the front side (the surface facing the player) of the game board 2, but the mode changeover switch 31 and / or the display changeover switch 32 is used. It may be provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 2. In such a configuration, the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 3 is used to rotate the gaming board 2 forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 so that the gaming board 2 can be moved to the back surface side of the gaming board 2. The provided mode changeover switch 31 and / or display changeover switch 32 can be operated.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, there is a start winning command as described above. The start winning command includes a start winning opening designation command indicating whether the starting winning opening has occurred in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, or the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. There is a start winning judgment result designation command and the like indicating a big hit determination result and a big hit type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

The CPU 103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a prize is detected, a random number for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted random number for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type are used as the first random number in the random number storage area for the first special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "first starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Executes the start winning judgment to determine whether or not.

In this start winning determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start winning determination result specification command that specifies "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set as a command for specifying a determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (designating the "first starting winning opening") and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value (that is, according to the first starting winning opening). When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "first start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit judgment random number and the big hit type judgment random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit judgment random number and the big hit type judgment random number are used in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "second starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Executes the start winning judgment to determine whether or not.

In this start winning determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start winning determination result specification command that specifies "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set as a command for specifying a determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (designating the "second starting winning opening") and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (that is, according to the second starting winning opening) in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "second start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

In this embodiment, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and the look-ahead is read based on the determination result. Although the advance notice effect is executed, it is not limited to such a form, and the variation pattern of the variable display corresponding to the start prize is determined based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of the start prize, and the variation pattern is determined. The look-ahead notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Then it is good.

Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a variation pattern for a big hit determination. Along with the random number and the random number for determining the jackpot type, the random numbers are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. Further, when the CPU 103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern as a random number for determining a big hit and a big hit. Along with the random number for type determination, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the second special figure.

[1-2. Display of connection ratio and role ratio]
In the game machine 1, in the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry" The number of game balls entering the area) is totaled. Further, in the gaming machine 1, information such as a connection ratio and a combination ratio can be displayed on a display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 will be described as being provided on the main board 11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 29 is provided on other boards such as the effect control board 12, the relay board 15, and the payout control board. You may do so.

On the game machine maker side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of maintenance is being carried out, and as a result of the maintenance, whether the gaming medium has entered the general winning area at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of maintenance has been made in the gaming machine having the general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 will be described.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 2 is a board that controls games. The main board 11 is enclosed in a board case 201 as shown in FIG. 4, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main board 11 as shown in FIG. 4 (A). There is. The display monitor 29 is arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the game board 2 when the glass door frame 3a is opened. This is the front of the door, which is different from the front of the gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the gaming machine 1 may be common.

On the main board 11, information on winning a game, for example, the number of winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening. The number of prize balls by winning the (attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled, and the display monitor 29 is the ratio of the total number of prize balls by the number of prize balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker). Consecutive character ratio (referred to as "ream ratio") (%), the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the prize by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls The character ratio (referred to as "role ratio") (%), which is the ratio of the number of balls, is displayed.

The ream ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning a prize in the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening (attacker), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the total number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the gaming ball changes as the passable width of the gaming ball fluctuates. be. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of the game ball is a certain amount.

As a method of totaling and calculating information on winning a game, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) by winning the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls, the first 2 The number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the starting prize opening (Denchu), and the special electric role prize, which is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker). The number of balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power by winning the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) to be totaled The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Further, 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated.

The display monitor 29 switches and displays 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative ratios (%), and combination ratios (%) at predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (navel) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning a prize and the number of prize balls due to winning a prize at the big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) for 6000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 6000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the total prize balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting the numbers and performing the aggregation at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the continuous ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces).

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 6000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 4,200 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. Further, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. Further, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired balls] x 100 ... (1)
Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning balls + number of winning balls) / total number of winning balls] x 100 ... (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 6000 and the number of winning balls is 4200, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (rounded down to the first decimal place) by dividing 4200 by 6000.
However, since the microcomputer used for the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 420000. Then divide this 420,000 by 6000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 60. Then divide 4200 by this 60. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 6000, but in order to calculate the bonus ratio over a long period of time, a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down to the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the gaming machine becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, a decimal number. Calculate 234 in the notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

The third calculation method facilitates the calculation by the microcomputer used in the gaming machine, but causes an error of + 12%. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is close to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 29. In addition, the "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.

Further, the board case 201 is provided with a sticker for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 11. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and stickers are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 29. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, when the display monitor 29 is arranged in the first part of the main board 11 (for example, the central part of the main board 11), the second part is different from the first part in the main board 11. Even if other electrical components or the like are arranged in a portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the main board 11), a hole portion, a heat radiation hole, or a seal is arranged in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main board 11. good. In particular, it is preferable to provide the heat dissipation hole in the vicinity of the display monitor 29 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 29. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat dissipation hole is arranged at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 29. According to this, since the display monitor 29 does not interfere with the visibility, it is easy to confirm the information regarding the winning.

Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11. Specifically, the portion of the board case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main board 11 does not overlap with the hole portion to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being obstructed by the wiring.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine, but in order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment display monitor 29, the display monitor 29 should be separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them so as to sandwich them. The other electronic components referred to here are preferably large-scale control components such as CPUs.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer equipped with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball). The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the check sum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is used. Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be described further later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1987/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. Since it is necessary to avoid the calculation with a decimal point when performing the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, it is replaced with the following calculation formula. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1987/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of bonus balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, since the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 29 displays the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) on 7 segments, and displays each value by switching it every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously ratio (30 seconds later). If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate from each other. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 4 can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

Further, in the above calculation method, an example of totaling the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for the bonus, and the number of winning balls for the continuous bonus on the counter is shown. A sensor provided detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, each prize ball number is individually totaled, and then a counter for the number of winning balls and a counter for the number of consecutive winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated in. In addition, a sensor individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge, are used, and based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated in the counter of the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the counter of the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the joint ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which the sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result.

As shown in FIG. 2, a display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board 2 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 in the gaming machine 1. On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. There is. The main board 11 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. The main board 11 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 11 may be overlapped so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

The RAM 102 in the main board 11 has a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, and the like. A third general prize number counter, a fourth general prize number counter, and a large prize number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 21A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 21B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

Further, a clear switch is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or combination ratio. Further, when the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with an RTC 106. The main board 11 can detect the current time by the RTC 106. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of a store.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the main board 11 is housed in the board case 201. A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts against the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing sticker 11S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. As described above, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S.

The display monitor 29 includes a liquid crystal display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. The liquid crystal display units 29A to the fourth display unit 29D are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These liquid crystal display units 29A to 4th display unit 29D can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 4B is displayed on the display monitor 29. The upper two digits of the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B display the aggregation period, and the lower two digits of the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D display the numerical value as a percentage. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 2 displays the total cumulative combination ratio.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio and the winning ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the reciprocal ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the liquid crystal display unit "Y7." Is displayed on 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B display "A6." "A7." Is displayed on the display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D, and the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

The main board 11 is the number of entry of the attacker, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening from the first general winning opening in calculating the joint ratio and the winning combination. Aggregating. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a first gate switch 21A and a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning port switch 24A to a fourth general. A state confirmation process for confirming the state (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 24D is performed.

In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate pass count counter and the second gate pass count counter are added, and the first start port switch 22A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 22B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the detection signal is output. When the value of the large winning number counter is added and the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. Is the number of game balls entering each entry area (each prize) by adding the values of the first general prize counter, the second general prize counter, the third general prize counter, and the fourth general prize counter. The number of winning game balls to the mouth) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (included in the switch state confirmation process). ) Therefore, it is possible to total the number of game balls entering each approach area without executing a separate totaling program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to an increase in the number of execution programs. ..

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 5, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is as follows: general winning opening prize balls (prize balls by winning from the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode)). 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting prize opening (heso)), ordinary electric role prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric role prize ball (winning to the attacker) It is the number of prize balls. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are totaled individually. The number of game ball winnings may be aggregated. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of these prize balls. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas consisting of counters of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area consisting of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of a counter with a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a ratio / combination ratio storage area for storing 10 sets of combinations and total cumulative combination ratios and connection ratios. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of prize balls for each of the 10 sets and the total cumulative total of winning openings, and the 10 sets are equivalent. And, it is stored in the ratio combination storage area that stores the total total combination ratio and connection ratio. The ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter having a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio as an integer, a counter with a maximum of 1 byte can store the combination ratio and the connection ratio with a margin.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 6, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter)). Of these, 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area of the memory space (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment), and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Further, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is composed of a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. Has been done. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to this RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are used. Data for the configured control program (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the above control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a storage area for 10 sets of ratio combinations are provided. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data having different start addresses of the subroutines.

In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio and the combination ratio. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items.
FIG. 8A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 8 (B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Will be done. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 8 (B-2), the character "y" is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Will be done. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 8 (B-3), the character "A" is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 8 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8 (B-5). After that, the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage of the total sum and total total storage area for 10 sets and the ratio and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and connection ratio of 10 sets and total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", and "66", respectively. "117" "45" "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily erased and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 shown in FIG. 2 includes a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a. The opening of the glass door frame 3a does not correspond to an abnormality when it is performed by an employee, but it often corresponds to an abnormality when it is performed by a person other than the employee. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. When the door opening sensor detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a, the door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 11.

Door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 3a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a by a person other than the employee. Here, the door opening is detected on the assumption that the glass door frame 3a is abnormally opened. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 3a normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes that the glass door frame 3a is opened. Since there are many, it is possible to prevent any particular problems from occurring.

[1-3. process]
Subsequently, the control regarding the display of the ratio / combination ratio executed on the main board 11 will be described. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. The data used for displaying the ratio and the combination ratio stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. After making the initial settings, the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. The connection ratio / combination ratio related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the continuous ratio / combination ratio related processing. On the main board 11, as shown in FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation is detected in the continuous ratio / combination ratio related process (step S101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S101; YES), preparation for warning display is performed (step S102), and the process proceeds to step S103. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (step S101; NO), the winning information is acquired (step S103). As for the winning information, the game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Obtained by.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the business hours (step S104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured and determined by RTC106. As a result, when the current time is within the business hours (step S104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105). Whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105; YES), the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. It is determined whether or not the signal is present (step S106). The unit time and the predetermined number of balls here are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a prize cannot be won in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of launches of the game ball is 100 per minute, it can be appropriately determined, for example, up to 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by RTC106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

As a result, when the attacker does not win more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time (step S106; NO), the number of prize balls is added according to the prize information acquired in step S103. Processing is performed (step S107). The prize ball number addition process is performed when the warning display preparation is not performed. Here, if the warning display preparation is being made, the continuous ratio / combination ratio related processing is terminated as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, each prize ball number of the general prize opening (sode), the general prize opening (heso), the ordinary electric role prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area. Is added.

Further, in the prize ball number addition process, a general prize opening (sode), a general winning opening (heso), a normal electric prize ball (electric chew), and a special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. Calculate the total number of prize balls for each prize ball. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer is 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move it. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed up (calculation timer = 0) (step S108). As a result, when the calculation timer has not timed up (step S108; NO), the continuous ratio / combination ratio related processing is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is timed up (step S108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by adding in step S107 is the calculated execution number (step S110). The number of calculation executions may be an appropriate number, but for example, as a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number can be slightly smaller than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the number of calculation executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

As a result, if the number of prize balls (total prize balls) is not the calculated execution number (step S110; NO), the continuous ratio / combination ratio related process is terminated as it is. Further, when the number of prize balls is the calculated execution number (step S110; YES), the continuous ratio and the winning combination ratio are calculated (step S111). Here, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative continuous ratio (total cumulative ratio), and the cumulative combination ratio (total cumulative combination ratio) are calculated respectively. Therefore, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, cumulative continuous ratio, and cumulative combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, the continuous ratio / combination ratio display process is performed (step S112), and the continuous ratio / combination ratio related process is completed.

If it is determined in step S104 that it is not within business hours (step S104; NO), and if it is determined in step S105 that the door frame is not closed (step S105; NO), the attacker is made per unit time in step S106. When it is determined that the game balls have won more than a predetermined number of balls (step S106; YES), preparation for error display is performed (step S113). After that, the continuous ratio / combination ratio related processing is completed.

Next, the continuous ratio / combination ratio display control process will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing flow of the ratio / combination display control process. As shown in FIG. 11, in the continuous ratio / combination ratio display control process, it is determined whether or not the continuous ratio / combination ratio display preparation is completed (step S201). When it is determined that the continuous ratio / combination ratio display preparation process has not been completed (step S201; NO), it is determined whether or not the error display preparation has been completed (step S202).

As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (step S202; YES), an error display is performed (step S203). The error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and "0" and "1" can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when displaying an error, a predetermined error may be displayed on another display device, for example, an image display device 5, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, or the like, or a game. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Further, these may be combined.

After displaying the error, it is determined whether or not the warning display is ready (step S204). Further, even when it is determined in step S202 that it is not determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (step S202; NO), it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (step S204).

As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S204; YES), the warning display is performed (step S205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and "0" and "6" can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29 in order to indicate that the warning is given. Alternatively, the display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display of the display monitor 29. As described above, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays.

Further, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device, for example, an image display device 5, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, or the like, or a game. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Further, these may be combined.

When the warning is displayed, the continuous ratio / combination ratio control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in step S204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S204; NO), the continuous ratio / combination ratio control process is also terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the continuous ratio / combination ratio display preparation is completed (step S201; YES), the short-term continuous ratio display is performed (step S206). Subsequently, the short-term continuous ratio display is started to determine whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed (step S207). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S207; NO), the process returns to step S206 and the short-term continuous ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S207; YES), the process proceeds to step S208. In this way, the short-term continuous display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

Subsequently, the short-term combination ratio display is performed (step S208), and the short-term combination display is started to determine whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed (step S209). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S209; NO), the process returns to step S208 and the short-term combination ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S209; YES), the process proceeds to step S210. In this way, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

Subsequently, the cumulative ratio display is performed (step S210), and the cumulative ratio display is started to determine whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed (step S211). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S211; NO), the process returns to step S210 and the cumulative ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S211; YES), the process proceeds to step S212. In this way, the cumulative ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

Subsequently, the cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S212), and it is determined whether or not the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after the cumulative combination display is started (step S213). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S213; NO), the process returns to step S212 and the cumulative combination ratio display is continued. In this way, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S213; YES), the continuous ratio / combination ratio control process is terminated.

As described above, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 displays the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative continuous ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of maintenance has been added to the game nails (obstacle nails) and wind turbines provided on the game board.

Further, the display monitor 29 is arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered. Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole provided in the board case 201 is not directly in front of the board case 201. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being obscured by the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being hindered.

Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being obscured by peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being hindered.

In addition, the display monitor 29 can display the ratio and the winning ratio regarding the relationship between the prize balls paid out by the passage of the electric chew or the attacker and the prize balls paid out by the passage of the general winning opening. .. Further, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term continuous ratio and a cumulative continuous ratio at predetermined intervals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

Further, since the display monitor 29 displays the ratio (short-term combination ratio) and the combination ratio (short-term combination ratio) for each 6000 prize balls, the total number of prize balls becomes 6000, and so on. The numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000. Alternatively, time may be used as a unit instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

Further, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the cumulative ratio (short-term continuous ratio) and the combination ratio (short-term combination ratio) for each prize ball number of 6000, as well as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative combination ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term continuous ratio or short-term combination ratio for each predetermined unit with the cumulative continuous ratio or cumulative combination ratio. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 housed in the crimped board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsifying the display on the display monitor 29.

Further, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a detection means for detecting and detecting fraud that makes it impossible to display appropriate predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside business hours for games, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The gaming machine 1 operates during the business hours of the store, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls during the hours other than the business hours is a fraudulent act. Further, the gaming machine 1 plays a game with the door frame closed, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is a fraudulent act.

Further, during the game of the game machine 1, the game ball cannot be launched beyond a certain speed. For example, the maximum number of launches of a game ball is 100 per minute. Therefore, the upper limit of winning a game ball in one minute is almost 100. Therefore, for example, when 100 or more game balls are won in 1 minute or 20 or more in 12 seconds, the probability of cheating is extremely high.

In the game machine 1, in order to detect fraud, a prize ball is obtained when the game ball is not closed during business hours, the glass door frame 3a is not closed, or the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. The addition of numbers is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of information such as the ratio and the combination ratio due to these frauds. In addition, instead of the number of prize balls when the attacker has won more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time, fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time.

Further, in the game machine 1, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

Further, the ring buffer is provided with a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the tenth storage area is stored. It will be erased. Therefore, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area thereof, is erased in the ring buffer. Therefore, since the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity, and it is possible to calculate the connection ratio and the combination ratio with a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area may be erased, but also all the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. .. In this case, it is possible to more preferably prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. Further, a part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased, and then a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Further, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but the data other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total cumulative total is also erased in part or all in the same manner. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, each data of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative continuous ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The cycle for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate cycle. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be hourly. Further, the displayed data may be data other than the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, and cumulative combination ratio data, or may be only a part of these data.

In addition, when displaying each data of short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, cumulative continuous ratio, and cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, short-term ratios are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that new data is displayed from the short-term comparison.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, a warning display is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio. When this switch is operated, the data of the connection ratio and the combination ratio can be falsified, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 1, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, fraud such as falsification of data can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, and the third general winning opening switch 24C , The continuous ratio and the winning combination ratio are calculated based on the number of prize balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. For example, using a sensor (count switch 23) individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passages for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge. Based on the detection result, when the counter of the number of winning balls and the counter of the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled to calculate the joint ratio and the winning combination ratio, it is difficult to identify from which winning opening the winning combination is made. There is a risk that the calculation of ratios and joint ratios will become complicated. In this regard, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24C. By detecting that the game medium has won a prize with the switch 24D and calculating the continuous ratio and the winning combination ratio based on the number of prize balls obtained from the detection result, the number of prize balls is determined based on the prizes in each winning opening. can. Therefore, the joint ratio and the combination ratio can be easily calculated and can be calculated accurately.

[1-4. Modification example]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. note that,
The control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms and the following modification examples are shown. The control and configuration of the gaming machine may be arbitrarily combined.

In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to winning a game, but a counter having a maximum of 3 bytes and a counter having a maximum of 4 bytes are provided. You can also. At this time, a calculation for displaying the above-mentioned two types of the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) on the above-mentioned display monitor 29 from the total number of acquired balls of the game medium (prize ball) paid out from the gaming machine. The method is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 12, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for a bonus, and the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the calculation is performed using the upper 16 bits. You may go. By the way, assuming that the number of acquired balls is 30,000 per day by the 4-byte counter, 4294863225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days. = Approximately 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4A, an example in which the display monitor 29 is provided in the central portion on the main board 11 housed in the board case 201 has been described, but the display monitor 29 is described. , May be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, a main board 11C without a display monitor and a display board 11D are provided separately from the main board 11C, and the main board 11C and the display board 11D are connected by a harness 11E. The display monitor 29 may be provided on the display board 11D. In this case, the main board 11C performs the calculation of the connection ratio and the combination ratio to be displayed on the display monitor 29 and the reception of the data to be used for these calculation. The main board 11C transmits the calculated connection ratio and combination ratio, as well as information on control for displaying these, to the display board 11D via the harness 11E. In the display board 11D, the connection ratio and the combination ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 29 based on the data transmitted from the main board 11C.

Further, the main board 11C and the display board 11D are housed in a board case 201A which is a caulking board case. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the substrate case 201A as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 4 (A). By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11C and the display board 11D are completely enclosed in the board case 201A, and fraudulent acts against the main board 11C are prevented. Further, also in the substrate case 201A, as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 4A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and stickers are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 29.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the display board 11D may be provided on the outside of the board case 201B which is a caulking board case, and the main board 11C may be enclosed in the board case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C by a harness 11E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13C, the display board 11D may be enclosed in the substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C by a harness 11E. Further, also in the substrate case 201C, as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 4A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and stickers are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 29. The substrate case 201C that encloses the display substrate 11D does not have to be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 4 (A), and a caulking use record is described on the label 11R. May be good. Here, the label 11R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden. By hiding a part of the display monitor 29 by the label 11R in this way, for example, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, the player can easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the connection ratio and the combination ratio. Further, even when the label 11R is attached, the display monitor 29 may be attached at a position where it is not hidden.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the movable accessory, an electric accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid and a second starting winning opening (electric chew) is used. Alternatively, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by the weight of the game ball may be used as a movable accessory. Further, although the 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 29, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment LED. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 3a may be opened to take measures such as error cancellation regardless of the content to be displayed on the display monitor 29, for example, the display of the continuous ratio or the combination ratio. For example, in order to pay out the game balls, a supply mechanism for supplying the game balls (replenishment balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 3. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball clogging occurs, the glass door frame 3a may be opened to clear the ball clogging and release the error. When the glass door frame 3a is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, etc. may not be displayed on the display monitor 29. good.

Further, in order not to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 at this time, it may be a condition that no error has occurred in the display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, or the like. The error in displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the like here is, for example, detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S101 shown in FIG. 10, acquisition of winning information during business hours determined in step 104, and step S106. It may be the detection of a predetermined number or more of prizes for the attacker per unit time determined by. By providing the condition that such an error in the display of the connection ratio and the combination ratio does not occur, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player sees the information such as the connection ratio and the combination ratio.

Further, the glass door frame 3a is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, and after the error clearing is completed, a predetermined period until the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, etc. with respect to the display monitor 29 are displayed. For example, it may be waited for one minute and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. After the error occurrence is cleared, the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely eliminated, and similar errors often occur in succession. By displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the information such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, etc. even when such an error occurs. .. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and the case of failure of the image display device 5, the predetermined period of the ball clogging of the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as “error display”) for displaying an error. It is preferable that the error display is arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29. Specifically, the display monitor 29 may be arranged at the position of the right side 1/3 of the main board 11, and the error display may be arranged at the position of the left side 1/3 of the main board 11. Further, in order to make the display monitor 29 easy to understand, the location of the display monitor 29 on the main board 11 may be printed in characters on the board case 201, or a sticker may be attached to the board case 201. You may leave it.

In addition, it was explained that the combination ratio (%) and the linkage ratio (%) are calculated using the pachinko gaming machine as an example and displayed on the display monitor. %) May be calculated and displayed.

The method of calculating the ratio (%) in the slot machine will be described below. The slot machine can start the fluctuation of the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated according to the result of the fluctuation of the symbol. For winnings in slot machines, we will shift to a special gaming state that increases the probability of occurrence of grant prizes, grant prizes that accompany the addition of game value, re-game prizes that allow the start of symbol fluctuations without setting the number of bets, and grant prizes. There is a bonus prize. Here, the ratio (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of the game value (the above-mentioned pachinko game) obtained by the award winning as a result of the change of the symbol during the period in which the change of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. Cumulative total of game value (corresponding to the total number of balls acquired in the machine) obtained by giving a prize as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period of transition to the special gaming state (in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine) It is expressed as a ratio of (corresponding to the number of consecutive winning balls). For example, in a period in which the symbol is changed 6000 times, when the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, a prize is awarded during the period of transition to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the continuous ratio (%).

An example of displaying the calculated combination ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) on a display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the center of the main board is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control board, etc. A display monitor may be provided on another board, a game board surface, a game machine frame (underframe), or the like. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one provided with a dedicated display monitor for displaying the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%), and is not limited to the existing display device (for example, the image display device 5, 7-segment display for displaying an error). The combination ratio (%) or the continuous ratio (%) may be displayed by using a device, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, or the like).

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, one variation is made when the variation is started. An example of transmitting a pattern specification command is shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) has the presence or absence of pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of slipping effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, the previous fluctuation pattern) of the second stop is transmitted, and the second command determines the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, and the like. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (for example, the post-variation pattern) after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode shown by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Only one type of off-design (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. .. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, etc., the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a winning by enclosing the gaming medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that grants.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the game machine, for example, the game machine 1. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming system including the gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment will be described. As described above, the payout rate of game balls may be designed by servicing game nails and the like. However, since it is not possible to confirm from the outside what kind of maintenance has been performed on the game nails, there is a problem that it is difficult to judge whether or not the payout rate is as designed. Therefore, an embodiment of a gaming system including a gaming device (information display device) capable of determining whether or not the payout rate is as designed in the gaming machine will be described.

[2-1. System configuration]
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the first gaming system 1000A in the present embodiment.
The first gaming system 1000A includes a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on the gaming island, a data display device 1200 which is a kind of gaming device and information display device provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1, and each game. The inter-unit counting unit 500, which is a kind of gaming device, counting device, and recording medium processing device provided corresponding to the machine 1, the hall computer 600, which is a kind of management device, and the number of stored balls and the number of balls held by the player. It is configured to include a ball management computer 800, which is a kind of management device for managing the above. In this embodiment, the gaming machine is the gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment, and the description of the gaming machine 1 will be omitted again.

A data display device 1200 is installed at a predetermined position above each gaming machine 1 to display various information such as game information related to the game on the gaming machine 1 and store information related to store sales on a color liquid crystal screen. There is. Since the data display device 1200 is a terminal that discloses information to a player or a player, it can be paraphrased as an information disclosure terminal.

In the present embodiment, the data display device 1200 sets the display of the display unit 1230 included in the own device based on the display device setting data 691 which is the setting information for the data display device 1200 provided by the hall computer 600. , Set the light emission of the light emitting unit 1250 (left frame LED 1251 and right frame LED 1252) provided in the own device.

Here, the setting means to determine the operation of the own device so as to perform a specific operation. Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 provided corresponding to the data display device 1200 is referred to as "corresponding gaming machine 1", and the inter-unit counting unit 500 provided corresponding to the data display device 1200 is referred to. It is referred to as "corresponding unit 500".

In this embodiment, the setting data of the data display device 1200 will be described as being provided by the hall computer 600, which is a kind of management device, but the ball management is not a hall computer 600 but a kind of other management devices. The computer 800 may provide the setting data. In addition, management devices such as a member management computer that manages the member information of the registered player and a card management computer that manages the card information of the game card possessed by the player shall be installed in the store. The management device may provide the setting data.

The data display device 1200 includes a display unit 1230 which is a display means capable of displaying information about the corresponding gaming machine 1, and a processing unit 1210 which is a display control means for displaying and controlling the display unit 1230. Further, the data display device 1200 includes an operation unit 1220 having a call button 1221 and a touch panel 1222 which are operation means.

The display unit 1230 is the number of game balls acquired by the player during the non-big hit game state with respect to the number of outs, which is the number of game balls used by the player during the non-big hit game state in the non-advantageous state. Specific information based on the payout rate standard information, which is information on the payout rate standard, which is the ratio of a certain number of payouts, and the payout rate actual measurement value, which is the actual measurement value of the payout rate on the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the corresponding game. It is possible to display information related to the game history of the machine 1 (game history information).

Here, the specific information includes information on the calculation result based on the payout rate reference information and the payout rate actual measurement value, and information on the suitability of the payout rate actual measurement value determined based on the payout rate reference range and the payout rate actual measurement value ( Hereinafter, "payout rate suitability information") is included. The information regarding the calculation result based on the payout rate standard information and the payout rate actual measurement value includes, for example, an error of the payout rate actual measurement value with respect to the payout rate standard value calculated based on the payout rate standard information and the payout rate actual measurement value (hereinafter referred to as an error). "Payout rate error") is included. Further, the payout rate suitability information includes, for example, information indicating the suitability of the payout rate measured value in various display modes described later (color change icon in color change mode, meter in meter mode, payout rate error in error mode). Is done.

Further, the data display device 1200 is configured so that the special display can be displayed on the display unit 1230 separately from the display of the game information. The special display is a display that is specially executed when various game information is displayed and the execution condition of the predetermined special display is satisfied. In the present embodiment, a gaming machine error display for notifying an error that has occurred in the corresponding gaming machine 1, a display device error display for notifying an error that has occurred in the own device, and a notification that a big hit has occurred in the gaming machine 1. A jackpot effect display for playing, a simultaneous effect display for performing simultaneous effects such as running effects on multiple data display devices 1200, and a immersive prevention display for alerting players playing on the gaming machine 1 to be absorbed in the game. , The display of the card forgotten to call attention to the forgetting to remove the game card from the machine-to-machine counting unit 500, the display of the loan rate for notifying the loan rate of the game ball in the game machine 1, etc. are specially displayed. included.

The inter-unit counting unit 500 is provided side by side on the left (or right) side of each gaming machine 1, and is a recording medium for gaming owned by the player and a pachinko ball card which is a kind of gaming card. Upon receipt, a process (game enablement process) for enabling the player to play a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 is executed. The inter-unit counting unit 500 includes a counting and paying unit that counts the number of balls acquired by the player as the number of local counting balls and pays out the game balls according to the ball paying out operation. The counting / paying unit may have the same configuration as the counting / paying unit 380 included in the card unit 300, which will be described later, for example. The inter-unit counting unit 500 is also called an inter-unit machine (sand).

The hall computer 600 comprehensively manages each gaming machine 1 installed in the store. Further, the hall computer 600 comprehensively manages the data display device 1200 and the inter-unit counting unit 500 provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1.

The ball management computer 800 manages the number of balls held on the ball holding card that the player owns so that the player can use the game again.

Each gaming machine 1 is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number, and the game machine 1, the data display device 1200, and the machine-to-machine counting unit 500 are connected to the hall computer 600 or the ball management computer 800 via the machine terminal 900. It is connected. In this figure, for the sake of simplicity, four gaming machines 1 installed on the gaming island are shown.

[2-2. Signal and information flow]
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of signals and information between each device of the first gaming system 1000A. In this figure, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the stand terminal 900 is not shown.

The gaming machine signal is output from the gaming machine 1 to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600. Further, an out signal is output to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600 from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1. These signals will be described later.

From the inter-unit counting unit 500, a unit signal including a card insertion signal, a card ejection signal, a deposit signal, a consumption signal, a ball payout signal, a ball counting signal and a unit error signal is output to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600. NS.

The card insertion signal is a signal that is output when a game card is accepted, and a signal including the card ID of the accepted ball card is output.
The card ejection signal is a signal that is output when the accepted ball-bearing card is ejected.
The deposit signal is a signal that is output when the player deposits money. The deposit signal can be a signal output in units of a specific amount of money (for example, 100 yen).
The consumption signal is a signal that is output when the balance is consumed. The consumption signal can also be a signal output in units of a specific amount of money (for example, 100 yen).
The ball payout signal is a signal that is output when the game ball is paid out, and is output each time the game ball is paid out. One payout of a game ball can be, for example, in units of 25 balls.
The ball counting signal is a signal that is output when the game balls are counted, and is output each time the game balls are counted. The counting of game balls can be, for example, in units of one ball.
The unit error signal is a signal that is put into an output state when some kind of abnormality or abnormality occurs in the unit-to-unit counting unit 500.

From the hall computer 600, display device setting data 691 for the data display device 1200 to make various settings is output to the data display device 1200. Further, from the hall computer 600, a management device signal including a simultaneous effect signal for causing the data display device 1200 to perform the simultaneous effect, a periodic notification signal for performing the periodic notification, and the like is output to the data display device 1200. ..

The inter-unit counting unit 500 outputs an authentication request signal for requesting authentication of the ball holding card inserted in the own device to the ball management computer 800. The authentication request signal includes a unit ID which is an ID of the own device and a card ID recorded on the ball possession card.

The ball management computer 800 executes the authentication process according to the authentication request signal output from the inter-unit counting unit 500, and transmits the authentication signal to the inter-unit counting unit 500. The authentication signal includes an authentication result (OK / NG).

[2-3. Outer end output of the gaming machine]
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game machine signal output from an external output board included in the game machine 1 to an external device in the present embodiment. The external device referred to here means an external device communicably connected to the gaming machine 1, and in the present embodiment, the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600 are included in the external device.

From the external output board, a jackpot signal, a probability change signal, a time saving medium signal, a start signal, a prize ball signal, and a security signal are externally output as game machine signals. In addition to the security signal, a signal such as an error signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the own device or a door opening signal indicating that the glass door of the own device has been opened may be output externally. ..

The jackpot signal is a signal that is output when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.
The probability changing signal is a signal that is output when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability changing state, which is a high probability state.
The time-saving medium signal is a signal that is set to the output state when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the time-saving state, which is the high base state.
The start signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width, which is set as an output state when the display result of the special figure variable display unit is derived and displayed in the gaming machine 1.
The prize ball signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width, which is output in the game machine 1 each time the first predetermined number of balls is paid out. The first specified number of balls can be, for example, "10 balls".
The security signal is a signal that is output when some kind of fraud or abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 1.

Further, as described above, the out signal is output to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600 from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1.
The out signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width, which is set to an output state each time the second specified number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is counted by the out ball detector 200. The second specified number of balls can be, for example, "10 balls".

[2-4. Configuration of inter-unit counting unit]
FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the inter-unit counting unit 500.
The front plate of the table-to-table counting unit 500 is configured in a rectangular shape with the longitudinal direction as the vertical direction, and includes a ticketing button 551, a payout button 552, and a seat leaving button 553 in the front center portion of the table-to-table counting unit 500. An operation button 550 and a card insertion slot 560 for the player to insert / remove the ball card are provided.

When the player presses the ticketing button 551, a ball-bearing card recording the number of balls possessed by the player (number of balls possessed) at that time is issued from the card insertion slot 560. Further, when the player presses the payout button 552, a predetermined unit number of balls (for example, a multiple of 25 balls: 125 balls, etc.) is refunded to the game machine 1, and the refunded pachinko balls are used. The player can play the game. Further, when the player presses the leave button 553, the issuance / return of the ball-carrying card from the inter-unit counting unit 500 is restricted, and the ball lending and ball-paying by the ball-carrying card being accepted are restricted.

The game machine 1 is provided with a ball lending button for lending the game ball to a position near the ball payout plate from which the game ball is paid out, and a return button for returning the ball holding card from the inter-unit operation unit 500. Is usually done. Therefore, the inter-unit counting unit 500 may issue a ball-holding card from the card insertion slot 560 in response to the pressing operation of the return button provided on the gaming machine 1.

The card insertion slot 560 is connected to a ball holding card reader / writer (R / W) 570 built in at a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 560, and is inserted from the card insertion slot 560 by the holding ball card R / W 570. The recorded information such as the card ID and the number of balls held on the card held is read and written.

Further, at a substantially central position of the inter-unit counting unit 500, a control unit 505 that controls the operation of the inter-unit counting unit 500 is provided so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the inter-unit counting unit 500. The control unit 505 controls various operations of the inter-unit counting unit 500.

The inter-unit counting unit 500 and the gaming machine 1 are a lending-related signal associated with the lending of pachinko balls having a predetermined number of balls as a lending unit, and a payout associated with the payout of pachinko balls having a predetermined number of payout units. It is configured to be able to send and receive related signals. The lending-related signals include a lending request signal for causing the game machine 1 to rent a game ball from the machine-to-machine counting unit 500, a machine terminal lending completion signal, a machine READY signal, and a machine-to-machine counting output from the game machine 1. Signals such as a unit READY signal and a stand terminal lending request completion confirmation signal are included. Further, the game machine 1 outputs game signals such as a big hit signal, a probability change signal, a time saving medium signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal, and an out ball detector 200 provided corresponding to the game machine 1. It is configured to be able to receive the out signal.

The inter-unit counting unit 500 includes a control unit 505, an operation button 550, a sound output unit 560, a ball card insertion / discharge unit 565, a ball card R / W 570, a first communication unit 571, and a second. It is configured to include a communication unit 572.

The control unit 505 includes a processing unit 510 having a processor such as a CPU and a DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC, a storage unit 520 having a storage device such as a ROM and a RAM, and time information. It is equipped with a clock unit 530 that can output memory information and the like.

The storage unit 520 stores a unit-to-unit counting unit processing program 521 that is read by the processing unit 510 and executed as the inter-unit counting unit processing. Further, the storage unit 520 stores the reception card data 523 in which information such as the card ID of the ball card being received and personal customization data is recorded.

The first communication unit 571 is a communication device for exchanging data and sending / receiving signals to / from the data display device 1200, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that communicates via a wired cable. ..

The second communication unit 572 is a communication device for exchanging data and transmitting / receiving signals with / from the ball management computer 800, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that communicates via a wired cable. .. The second communication unit 572 transmits the reception card data 523 to the ball management computer 800 under the control of the processing unit 510.

In the above, for convenience, the first communication unit 571 and the second communication unit 572 are separately shown and described as two communication units, but the first communication unit 571 and the second communication unit 572 are described separately. May be configured as one communication unit. The same applies to the communication unit in various other devices.

[2-5. Function configuration of hall computer]
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the hall computer 600.
The hall computer 600 includes a processing unit 610, an input unit 620, a display unit 625, a sound output unit 630, a clock unit 635, a first communication unit 640, a second communication unit 650, a ROM 670, and a hard disk 680. It is a computer system including RAM 690 and RAM 690, and each part is connected via a bus.

The processing unit 610 is controlled by having a processor such as a CPU or DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC that collectively controls each part of the hall computer 600 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the ROM 670. It is a device and an arithmetic unit. In the present embodiment, the processing unit 610 has a setting data generation unit 611, a game information aggregation unit 613, and a sales aggregation unit 615 as main functional units.

The setting data generation unit 611 is a functional unit that operates according to the setting data generation program 671a stored in the ROM 670, generates the display device setting data 691 described later, and uses the generated display device setting data 691 in the RAM 690. Store in.

The game information aggregation unit 613 is a functional unit that aggregates the game information of each gaming machine 1, and stores the aggregated game information as game aggregation data in the game aggregation database 688 of the hard disk 680.

The sales totaling unit 615 is a functional unit that aggregates the sales information of each game machine 1, and stores the aggregated sales information as sales management data in the sales management database 689 of the hard disk 680.

The input unit 620 is an input means configured to have, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a signal (operation signal) of the pressed key or button to the processing unit 610. By the operation input from the input unit 620, an instruction operation such as editing of data of various databases stored in the hard disk 680 is performed.

The display unit 625 is a display device that performs various displays based on the display control signal output from the processing unit 610, and includes an LCD and the like. The display unit 625 displays the contents of data of various databases stored in the hard disk 680.

The sound output unit 630 is a sound output device such as a speaker that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 610. From the sound output unit 630, for example, a warning sound or the like for notifying the administrator when calling attention or when an abnormality occurs is output as a sound.

The clock unit 635 is an internal clock included in the hall computer 600, and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator and a crystal oscillator including an oscillation circuit. The clock time (including the date) of the clock unit 635 is output to the processing unit 610.

The first communication unit 640 is a communication device for communicating with the gaming machine 1, and is configured to include, for example, a wired communication module that communicates via a wired cable. The first communication unit 640 receives the above-mentioned game machine signal from the game machine 1 and also receives the above-mentioned out signal from the out ball detector 200.

The second communication unit 650 is a communication device for communicating with the data display device 1200, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that communicates via a wired cable. The second communication unit 650 transmits (delivers) the display device setting data 691 to the data display device 1200 under the control of the processing unit 610.

The ROM 670 is a read-only non-volatile storage device, and stores various programs such as a system program of the hall computer 600. In the present embodiment, the ROM 670 stores a management program 671 that is read out by the processing unit 610 and executed as a management process. The management program 671 includes a setting data generation program 671a executed as a setting data generation process as a subroutine.

It is also possible to configure the hall computer 600 so that the ROM 670 is not provided as a storage device. In this case, the above-mentioned various programs may be stored in, for example, the hard disk 680.

The hard disk 680 is a readable / writable non-volatile storage device, and stores various data related to the display settings of the data display device 1200 and various databases related to the game on the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the display content setting table 681, the display mode setting table 682, the special display setting table 683, the payout rate suitability information display setting table 684, the model information setting table 685, and the device support are provided. The relationship table 686, the game aggregation database 688, and the sales management database 689 are stored.

The display content setting table 681 is a table for setting the display content of the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the display content setting table 681, the gaming machine ID, the model name, the display screen, and the special display are stored in association with each other.

The gaming machine ID is identification information (ID) for uniquely identifying each gaming machine 1, and is individually assigned to each gaming machine 1.
The model name is the model name of the gaming machine 1 of the gaming machine ID.
The display screen is a type of screen to be displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200.
The special display is the content of the special display to be displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200.

This will be described in detail.
The model name of the gaming machine 1 having the gaming machine IDs P1 to P20 is "Pachinko XXX". As display screens, (1) a comprehensive game history screen, (2) an individual game history screen, and (3) a menu screen are defined.

(1) The comprehensive game history screen is a screen for displaying comprehensive game history information in the game machine 1. On this comprehensive game history screen, as comprehensive game history information, the total number of big hits, the total number of probable variable big hits, the total number of normal big hits, the total number of starts, the total payout graph and the total big hit history graph, and the payout rate suitability information are displayed. It is stipulated.

The total number of big hits is the total number of all big hits (probability variable big hits, normal big hits) generated in the gaming machine 1.
The total number of probability variation jackpots is the total number of probability variation jackpots generated in the gaming machine 1.
The total number of normal jackpots is the total number of normal jackpots generated by the gaming machine 1.
The total number of starts is the total number of starts in the gaming machine 1.
The comprehensive payout graph is a graph showing the transition of the overall payout of the gaming machine 1.
The comprehensive jackpot history graph is a graph of the number of jackpots that have occurred in the gaming machine 1 in the past predetermined period (for example, for the past week).
The payout rate suitability information is information for allowing a player or a store employee to confirm the suitability of the payout rate actually measured by the gaming machine 1.

(2) The individual game history screen is a display screen for displaying individual game history information in the game machine 1. On this personal game history screen, as personal game history information, the number of individual big hits, the number of individual probability change big hits, the number of individual normal big hits, the number of individual starts, the personal payout graph and the personal ball possession image, and the payout rate suitability information are displayed. It is stipulated.

The number of individual jackpots is the total number of all jackpots (probability variation jackpots, normal jackpots) of individual players generated in the gaming machine 1.
The number of individual probability variation jackpots is the total number of probability variation jackpots of individual players generated in the gaming machine 1.
The number of individual normal jackpots is the total number of individual normal jackpots generated by the gaming machine 1.
The number of individual starts is the total number of starts for each individual player on the gaming machine 1.
The individual payout graph is a graph showing the transition of the payout of the individual player of the gaming machine 1.
The personal ball possession image is an image showing the player's individual ball possession in the gaming machine 1. The personal ball image is displayed, for example, with 1000 balls corresponding to one dollar box and 10,000 balls corresponding to one special box, and the dollar box and special box are increased or decreased according to the increase or decrease in the number of balls. Can be made to.

(3) The menu screen is a display screen for a player playing a game on the gaming machine 1 to select a menu. On the menu screen, as menu information, to explain to the player how to adjust the volume and light amount to enable the player to adjust the volume and light amount of the data display device 1200, and how to use the data display device 1200. A description of how to use the data and display customization for allowing the player to freely customize the position, size, color, etc. of displaying various information on the data display device 1200 are defined.

In addition, the special display includes (1) jackpot effect display, (2) simultaneous effect display, (3) periodical notification display, (4) entanglement prevention display, (5) card forgetting display, and (6) gaming machine error display. , (7) Display device error display, (8) Lending rate display, are defined.

(1) The jackpot effect display is a display related to an effect of congratulating the occurrence of a jackpot when a jackpot occurs in the gaming machine 1. The jackpot effect display includes a display of a jackpot effect image, a jackpot effect image, and the like. For the purpose of congratulating the occurrence of the big hit in one gaming machine 1, the big hit effect display is executed as a special display.

(2) The simultaneous effect display is a display related to a simultaneous effect performed simultaneously among a plurality of data display devices 1200. This simultaneous effect display includes a display of a simultaneous effect image, a simultaneous effect image, and the like. The simultaneous effect display is executed as a special display for the purpose of increasing the player's motivation to play by performing the simultaneous effect in conjunction with the plurality of data display devices 1200.

The following two methods can be considered as the methods for realizing the simultaneous production.
(1) The management device instructs each data display device 1200 to execute the simultaneous effect.
(2) Each data display device 1200 independently performs simultaneous production.

In the method (1), for example, the hall computer 600, which is a management device, outputs a simultaneous effect signal instructing each data display device 1200 to execute the simultaneous effect. Each data display device 1200 executes the simultaneous effect at the timing when the simultaneous effect signal is input from the hall computer 600. In this case, it is desirable that the hall computer 600 outputs the simultaneous effect signal to each data display device 1200 at the same time so that the timing of the simultaneous effect does not shift.

In the method (2), each data display device 1200 executes a simultaneous effect based on the time measured internally and the elapsed time from the time when the power is turned on. Specifically, the simultaneous production is executed at the timing when the time reaches a predetermined time or when the elapsed time from the time when the power is turned on reaches the predetermined time. In this case, it is desirable that all the data display devices 1200 are turned on at the same time so that the timing of the simultaneous production does not shift.

In this case, the process related to the simultaneous effect may be programmed in the data display device 1200 in advance so that any of the above methods (1) and (2) can be applied.

Further, the hall computer 600 may set which of the above methods (1) and (2) is applied to execute the simultaneous effect. In this case, the setting data that determines which process is applied to the data display device 1200 from the hall computer 600 to realize the simultaneous effect is included in the display device setting data 691 described later, and each data is displayed. It may be delivered to the device 1200.

Further, in the present embodiment, the simultaneous effect display includes a big hit running effect display. The jackpot running effect congratulates the jackpot on the data display device 1200 provided corresponding to these gaming machines 1 when there is a jackpot gaming machine 1 among the gaming machines 1 of the same model or the same game island. It is a production that displays a special image. Whether or not a game machine 1 that has a big hit exists in the game machine 1 of the same model or the same game island can be determined by whether or not a big hit signal is input from the game machine 1 of the same model or the same game island. can.

In addition, when a big hit occurs in a plurality of game machines 1 of the same model or the same game island, and a big hit signal is input from a plurality of game machines 1 with a time difference, a big hit running effect is being executed for one game machine 1. If so, the jackpot running effect may be newly executed during the running jackpot running effect, or the jackpot running effect may be newly executed after the running jackpot running effect is completed. Further, if a big hit occurs in the other gaming machine 1 during the big hit running effect, the execution of the new big hit running effect may be omitted.

The above-mentioned jackpot running effect can be realized by displaying the jackpot image on the data display device 1200 from one end of the game island to the other with a constant time difference. The jackpot running effect is an effect that is produced with a certain time difference, but since it is still an effect that is performed simultaneously by a plurality of data display devices 1200, in the present embodiment, the jackpot running effect is one of the simultaneous effects. I will explain as one. The contents of the jackpot running effect and various effects described later can be determined for each model of the game machine 1 and each game island.

In addition, unlike the big hit running effect, when a big hit occurs in the gaming machine 1 provided corresponding to the data display device 1200 in the individual data display device 1200, the fanfare sound congratulating the big hit is displayed in the data. It may be output as a specific sound from the apparatus 1200.

In addition, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases to 1000, 2000, 3000, etc. with the occurrence of a big hit, 1000, 2000, 3000, etc. The breakthrough display of the number of possessed balls may be displayed on the display unit 1230, or the breakthrough effect of outputting the breakthrough notification sound of the number of possessed balls as a specific sound from the sound output unit 450 may be executed. The number of balls possessed when the breakthrough effect is executed may be 1000 shots, 5000 shots, or 10000 shots.

(3) The periodic notification display is a display related to the notification to be periodically performed by the data display device 1200. This periodic notification display includes display of various CM images, CM images, and the like. For the purpose of promoting various products and services, the periodical notice display is executed as a special display.

(4) The immersive prevention display is a display that alerts the player playing the game with the game machine 1 to be enthusiastic about the game. The squeeze prevention display includes a message, a video, an image, or the like that calls attention to the squeeze. For the purpose of preventing the player from being absorbed in the game and making a large investment, the insertion prevention display is executed as a special display.

(5) The card forgetting display is a display that alerts the player playing the game machine 1 to forget to remove the ball card from the pachinko / pachislot counting unit 500. The card forgotten display includes a message, a video, an image, or the like that alerts the user to forget to take the ball card. For the purpose of preventing the player from forgetting to take the ball card and matching it with the theft, the card forgotten display is executed as a special display.

(6) The gaming machine error display is a display indicating that an error including an abnormality or fraud has occurred in the gaming machine 1. Abnormalities in gaming machines include breakdowns of gaming machines, opening of doors, jamming of balls, etc., and fraudulent activities in gaming machines include so-called goto acts. The game machine error display is executed as a special display for the purpose of promptly calling a clerk to deal with an abnormality or fraud in the game machine.

(7) The display device error display is a display indicating that an error including an abnormality or an error has occurred in the data display device 1200. Abnormalities in the display device include failure of the display device and detection of unauthorized operation on the display device. The display device error display is executed as a special display for the purpose of promptly calling a clerk to deal with an abnormality or fraud in the display device.

(8) The loan rate display is the rate at which the game ball of the game machine 1 is rented, and includes the display of the loan rate of 4-yen pachinko, 2-yen pachinko, and 1-yen pachinko. The loan rate display is executed as a special display for the purpose of allowing the player to know the loan rate of the gaming machine that plays the game.

Regarding the data display device 1200 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 of the same model, for example, the display screen to be displayed as the default can be defined as the comprehensive gaming history screen or the menu screen. By doing so, the data display device 1200 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 of the same model can display a common screen for all the machines, and the appearance can be improved.

Further, the above special display may be defined to have the same display content regardless of the model of the gaming machine 1 or the gaming island, or may be defined to be different for each model or gaming island. .. Further, even when the same display content is defined as the special display, the display mode of the special display may be defined so that the display is performed in a different mode for each model or game island.

Further, although it is preferably for each model and each game island, for example, for each game ball rental rate (4 yen, 2 yen, 1 yen, etc.) in the game machine 1 and the type of the game machine 1 (4 yen, 2 yen, 1 yen, etc.) It is also possible to determine the display contents and display modes of different special displays for each type of gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine, slot machine, etc.) for each type (max type, middle type, Amadeji, etc.).

Further, the above-mentioned special display may notify the player of the content by a message, may notify the player of the content by an image or a video, or notify the player of the content by a combination of these. You may do it.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of various index values related to the reference information (design information) of the payout rate in the present embodiment, and shows the index values in a table format.
In this table, the index value, the name of the index value, and the detailed contents of the index value are defined in association with each other.

Here, the payout rate in question in the present embodiment is the payout rate in the “non-big hit medium and low base state” and the “non-big hit medium and high base state”. In other words, the payout rate for the game ball paid out by the prize ball by winning the big winning opening (attacker) in the big hit game state does not matter, and it is paid by the winning ball by winning the starting winning opening or the general winning opening. The issue is the payout rate of the game balls that have been issued.

The name of the index value "R1" is "low base payout number", and the detailed content is "number of payouts by prize balls in a non-big hit medium and low base state". That is, the low base payout number R1 is the number of balls paid out to the player by the prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening and the starting winning opening constituting the gaming machine 1 in the low base state during the non-big hit. However, in the gaming machine 1, in the low base state, basically, the second starting winning opening (electric chew) is not won, so the starting winning opening referred to here is the first starting winning opening (navel). Point to.

The index value "S1" is named "low base payout rate actual measurement value", and its detailed content is "ratio of R1 to the number of outs in a non-big hit medium and low base state". That is, the low base payout rate actual measurement value S1 is the ratio of the number of payouts paid out to the player by the prize ball to the number of outs in the low base state during the non-big hit.

The name of the index value "R2" is "the number of payouts on a high base", and the detailed content is "the number of payouts by prize balls in a non-big hit medium and high base state". That is, the high base payout number R2 is the number of balls paid out to the player by the prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening and the starting winning opening constituting the gaming machine 1 in the high base state during the non-big hit. However, in the gaming machine 1, not only the second starting winning opening (electric chew) but also the first starting winning opening (navel) can be won in the high base state, so the starting winning opening referred to here is. It refers to the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew).

The index value "S2" is named "high base payout rate actual measurement value", and its detailed content is "ratio of R2 to the number of outs in a non-big hit medium and high base state". That is, the high base payout rate actual measurement value S2 is the ratio of the number of payouts paid out to the player by the prize ball to the number of outs in the high base state during the non-big hit.

The name of the index value "E1" is "low base payout rate error", and the detailed content thereof is "difference between the payout rate reference value and the actual payout rate value in the low base state". That is, the low base payout rate error U indicates the amount of deviation of the actual payout rate in the low base state from the payout rate reference value defined for the low base state.

The name of the index value "E2" is "high base payout rate error", and the detailed content is "difference between the payout rate reference value and the actual payout rate value in the high base state". That is, the high-based payout rate error V indicates the amount of deviation of how much the measured payout rate value in the high-base state deviates from the payout rate reference value defined for the high-base state.

Here, the payout rate reference value is a design value of the payout rate assumed by the gaming machine maker, and is a value provided by the gaming machine maker to the store as an instruction manual for each model of the gaming machine. .. Further, the payout rate actual measurement value is a value of the payout rate actually measured by playing a game on the gaming machine 1.

In the present specification, the low base payout number R1 and the high base payout number R2 are comprehensively referred to as “payout number R”, and the low base payout rate actual measurement value S1 and the high base payout rate actual measurement value S2 are comprehensively referred to. Notated as "payout rate actual measurement value S". Further, the low base payout rate error E1 and the high base payout rate error E2 are comprehensively referred to as "payout rate error E".

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of reference relative information in the present embodiment, and shows a reference relative state in a table format.
In this table, the reference index value, the name of the reference index value, and the detailed contents of the reference index value are defined in association with each other.

The name of the reference index value "α1" is "low base payout rate standard lower limit value", and the detailed content thereof is "lower limit value of payout rate reference range in non-big hit medium and low base state".

The name of the reference index value "β1" is "low base payout rate standard upper limit value", and the detailed content thereof is "upper limit value of payout rate standard range in non-big hit medium and low base state".

The name of the reference index value "γ1" is "low base payout rate standard value", and the detailed content thereof is "reference value of payout rate in non-big hit medium and low base state".

The low base payout rate reference lower limit α1 and the low base payout rate reference upper limit β1 define the low base payout rate reference range α1 to β1, which is the reference range of the payout rate in the non-big hit medium and low base state.

The name of the reference index value "α2" is "high base payout rate standard lower limit value", and the detailed content thereof is "lower limit value of payout rate standard range in non-big hit medium and high base state".

The name of the reference index value "β2" is "high base payout rate standard upper limit value", and the detailed content thereof is "upper limit value of payout rate standard range in non-big hit medium and high base state".

The name of the reference index value "γ2" is "high base payout rate standard value", and the detailed content thereof is "standard value of payout rate in non-big hit medium and high base state".

The high base payout rate reference lower limit α2 and the high base payout rate reference upper limit β2 define the high base payout rate reference range α2 to β2, which is the reference range of the payout rate in the high base state.

Here, the payout rate standard range is the design range of the payout rate assumed by the gaming machine maker, similar to the above-mentioned payout rate reference value, and each model of gaming machine is handled by the gaming machine maker at the store. It is a numerical range provided as an instruction manual.

The payout rate reference value and the payout rate reference range are examples of the reference relative information according to the present invention, and the payout rate actual measurement value is an example of the actual measurement relative value according to the present invention.

Here, for the payout rate standard information including the above-mentioned payout rate standard value and the payout rate standard range, for example, the store manager refers to the instruction manual for each of the game machines 1 of each model provided by the game machine maker. Then, by performing the work of inputting to the hall computer 600, it is possible to store the information in the hall computer 600. Then, by transmitting the display device setting data 691 including the payout rate reference information from the hall computer 600 to the data display device 1200 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 of each model, the data display device 1200 It is possible to calculate the payout rate error and determine the suitability of the actual payout rate value.

Although it is different from the above, for example, a store employee refers to the instruction manual and directly inputs the payout rate standard information according to the model of the game machine 1 to the corresponding data display device 1200. By doing so, the payout rate reference information may be stored in the storage unit 1290 of the data display device 1200.

The display mode setting table 682 is a table for setting a display mode for displaying the display contents on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. 22. ..

The display mode setting table 682 stores data for each display screen and data for each special display for each gaming machine ID and model name.

The data for each display screen is data defined for each display screen defined in the display content setting table 681, and an example of the data structure is shown in FIG. 23.
In the data for each display screen, the display content and the display mode are defined in association with each other corresponding to the display screen.

On the display screen, the type of the display screen defined in the display content setting table 681 is defined. These display screens are display screens that are sequentially switched and displayed by tapping the screen switching icon displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200.
The display content is defined as the display content displayed in the mode for the display screen.
In the display mode, the display position, size (size), color, and the like of the display content on the display screen are defined.

This will be described in detail.
The data for each display screen shown in FIG. 23 is the data for the display screen "comprehensive game history screen", and in the mode "normal mode", the display contents are "total number of big hits", "total number of probable change big hits", and "total". "Normal jackpot count", "total start count", "comprehensive payout graph", "comprehensive jackpot history graph", "service icon", and "screen switching icon" are defined. The comprehensive game history screen is set to be displayed on the data display device 1200 as an initial display screen (default display screen), for example.

The "total jackpot count" to "total jackpot history graph" are comprehensive game history information defined in the mode "normal mode" of the display content setting table 681, and the "service icon" and "screen switching icon" are touch panels. It is an icon used by the player to provide a service or switch screens by tapping the 1222, and is an icon that is always displayed on the display unit 1230. These icons are a kind of operation information for the player to perform various operations.

In the display mode, the position, size, color, etc. when displaying each display content on the comprehensive game history screen are individually defined. For the sake of simplicity, all are set as "*****" in the drawings. It is shown in the figure.

The data for each special display is data defined for each special display defined in the display content setting table 681, and an example of the data structure is shown in FIG. 24.
The data for each special display shown in this figure is data related to the simultaneous effect of the special display, and the special display, the type, the effect No., and the effect image are defined in association with each other.

The special display is defined as a simultaneous effect among the special displays defined in the display content setting table 681.
Simultaneous production is defined for the type.
In the effect No., the number of the simultaneous effect of the type is defined.
In the production video, the data of the video used in the simultaneous production of the type is defined.

This will be described in detail.
For example, a plurality of effects such as "big hit running effect", "live effect", and so on are defined for the type.
In the production No. "1" of the jackpot running production, "Movie_R1" is defined as the production image. In the production No. "1" of the live production, "Movie_L1" is defined as the production video.

The special display setting table 683 is a table for setting a special display to be displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. 25.
In the special display setting table 683, special display setting data is stored for each gaming machine ID and model name.

In the special display setting data, the priority and the special display are stored in association with each other for the gaming machine ID and the model name.

Numerical values from "1" to "8" are stored in the priority. The smaller the value, the higher the priority of display.
In addition, in the special display, in descending order of priority, "game machine error display", "display device error display", "entry prevention display", "card forgetting display", "big hit effect display", "simultaneous effect display" , "Periodic notification display", "Lending rate display" are stored.

In the present embodiment, the data display device 1200 controls the display unit 1230 to display the special display according to the establishment of the special display execution condition, which is the execution condition defined for each special display. Then, when a certain period of time has elapsed since the execution of the special display is started, the special display is terminated.

Further, when the special display execution condition is satisfied, the data display device 1200 determines whether or not the special display having a higher priority than the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is being executed. Then, when it is being executed, the execution of the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is restricted. On the contrary, when the special display having a lower priority than the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is being executed, the special display being executed is terminated and the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is executed. Is displayed.

Although it is different from the present embodiment, when the special display having a higher priority than the special display corresponding to the established special display execution condition is being executed, the special display being executed is waited until the execution is completed. After the special display being executed is finished, the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition may be displayed. In addition, if a special display with a lower priority than the special display corresponding to the established special display execution condition is being executed, the special display being executed is interrupted and the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is displayed. After the execution, the execution of the interrupted special display may be resumed.

The payout rate suitability information display setting table 684 is a table for setting the payout rate suitability information display of the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. 26.
The payout rate setting table 684 includes display condition setting data, display mode setting data, and detailed display setting data.

In the display condition setting data, the display setting No., which is the setting number of the display condition, and the display condition in the display setting No. are defined in association with each other.
In the display setting No. "a1", "always" is defined as a display condition. This means that the payout rate suitability information is set to be displayed at all times.
In the display setting No. "a2", "-(always hidden)" is defined as a display condition. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be hidden at all times.

In the display setting No. "a3", "the measured value of the payout rate is out of the payout rate reference range" is defined as the display condition. This means that when the actual measurement value S of the payout rate is out of the payout rate reference range, the payout rate suitability information is set to be displayed. When the actual measurement value S of the payout rate is within the payout rate reference range, the payout rate suitability information display is hidden.

In the display setting No. "a4", "the measured value of the payout rate is within the payout rate reference range" is defined as the display condition. This means that the payout rate suitability information is set to be displayed when the payout rate actual measurement value S is within the payout rate reference range. When the actual measurement value S of the payout rate is out of the payout rate reference range, the payout rate suitability information display is hidden.

In the display setting No. "a5", "display operation by the setting remote controller" is defined as a display condition. This means that when a signal instructing the display of the payout rate suitability information is received from the setting remote controller 700 possessed by the store clerk, the payout rate suitability information is set to be displayed.

In the display mode setting data, the display setting No., which is the number of the display mode setting, and the display mode in the display setting No. are defined in association with each other.

In the display setting No. "b1", a "color change mode" is defined as a display mode. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be displayed in the color change mode. The color change mode is a mode for displaying the suitability of the measured value of the payout rate by changing the color of the color change icon described later.

In the display setting No. "b2", a "meter mode" is defined as a display mode. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be displayed in the meter mode. The meter mode is a mode for displaying the suitability of the measured value of the payout rate by increasing or decreasing the meter, which will be described later.

In the display setting No. "b3", an "error mode" is defined as a display mode. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be displayed in the error mode. The error mode is a mode in which the appropriateness of the measured value of the payout rate is displayed by displaying the payout rate error.

The detailed display setting table is a table for detailed display settings in the display mode defined in the above display mode setting data, and display conditions and display modes are defined for each display mode.

The detailed display setting data shown at the top of FIG. 26 is data for a color change mode, and is defined by associating a type No., which is a type number, a condition, and a display color.

For the type No. "1", "α <S <β" is defined as a condition and "green" is defined as a display color. This means that when the actual measurement value S of the payout rate is larger than the lower limit value α of the payout rate standard and smaller than the upper limit value of the payout rate standard, the color change icon is set to be displayed in green in the color change mode. do. That is, when the payout rate actual measurement value S is within the payout rate reference range, the green display informs that the payout rate actual measurement value S is a value in the safe range (appropriate value).

In the type No. "2", "S = α or β = S" is defined as a condition, and "yellow" is defined as a display color. This is to set the color change icon to be displayed in yellow in the color change mode when the actual measurement value S of the payout rate is the same as either the lower limit value α of the payout rate reference and the upper / lower value β of the payout rate reference. Means. That is, when the payout rate measured value S is the boundary value of the payout rate reference range, the yellow display informs that the payout rate measured value S is the value of the boundary area (the value of the boundary between appropriate and inappropriate). do.

In the type No. "3", "S <α or β <S" is defined as a condition, and "red" is defined as a display color. This is to set the color change icon to be displayed in red in the color change mode when the actual measurement value S of the payout rate is smaller than the lower limit value α of the payout rate standard or larger than the upper limit value β of the payout rate standard. Means. That is, when the actual payout rate S is a value outside the reference range of the payout rate, the red display indicates that the actual payout value S is a dangerous area value (inappropriate value).

In addition, although not shown, display conditions such as the position, color, and size of the display mode (meter mode and error mode) other than the color change mode for displaying the payout rate suitability information are defined. ing.

The above display condition setting data is a table for setting common display conditions for payout rate suitability information regardless of the type of display mode, but is displayed for each display mode defined in the display mode setting data. The conditions may be set individually.

The model information setting table 685 is a table for setting the model information of the gaming machine 1 in the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. 27.
In the model information setting table 685, model information setting data is stored for each ID and model of the gaming machine 1.

The data for setting each model information includes the gaming machine ID which is the identification information of the gaming machine 1, the model name of the gaming machine 1, the outer end output data of the gaming machine 1, and the payout rate of the gaming machine 1. Reference information data is stored.

The outer end output data defines the use of the external output terminal (connector CN) from the gaming machine 1 to the external device and the type of signal to be output.

The payout rate standard information data includes the payout rate standard in which the lower limit value of the payout rate standard, the upper limit value of the payout rate standard, and the payout rate standard value are associated with each of the low base and high base types of the gaming machine 1. Information is defined.

This will be described in detail.
The data shown at the top of FIG. 27 is data related to the ID of the gaming machine 1 being "P1 to P20" and the model name being "Pachinko XXX". The outer end output data includes a jackpot signal from CN1, a probability change signal from CN2, a time saving medium signal from CN3, a start signal from CN4, a prize ball signal from CN5, and a prize ball signal from CN6. It is stipulated that each security signal is output.

In addition, in the payout rate standard information data, "α1" is set as the payout rate standard lower limit value, "β1" is set as the payout rate standard upper limit value, and "γ1" is set as the payout rate standard value for the type "low base". For the type "high base", "α2" is set as the lower limit value of the payout rate standard, "β2" is set as the upper limit value of the payout rate standard, and "γ2" is set as the payout rate standard value.

The device correspondence table 686 is a table that defines the correspondence between the gaming machine 1, the data display device 1200, and the inter-unit counting unit 500, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. 28.
In the device correspondence table 686, the game machine ID, the model name, the corresponding display device ID which is the identification information of the data display device 1200 corresponding to the game machine 1 of the game machine ID, and the game machine of the game machine ID are displayed. Corresponding unit ID, which is the identification information of the inter-unit counting unit 500 corresponding to 1, is defined in association with each other.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the display device setting data 691.
The display device setting data 691 includes a data display device ID 6911 which is an ID of the data display device 1200, a corresponding game machine ID 6912 which is an ID of the game machine 1 corresponding to the data display device 1200, and the data display device 1200. The corresponding unit ID 6913, which is the ID of the inter-unit counting unit 500 corresponding to the above, the display content setting data 6914, the display mode setting data 6915, the special display setting data 6916, and the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917. And 6918 for model information setting are included.

The display content setting data 6914 is data for setting the display content of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, from the data records defined in the display content setting table 681 (see FIG. 19), the gaming machine ID corresponding to the data display device ID is defined based on the device correspondence table 686. The record of the data is extracted and used as the display content setting data 6914.

The display mode setting data 6915 is data for setting the display mode of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, from the display mode setting data defined in the display mode setting table 682 (see FIG. 22), regarding the gaming machine ID corresponding to the data display device ID based on the device correspondence table 686. The defined data is extracted and used as display mode setting data 6915.

The special display setting data 6916 is data for setting the special display of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, from the special display setting data defined in the special display setting table 683 (see FIG. 25), the display device ID corresponding to the data display device ID is based on the device correspondence table 686. The defined data is extracted and used as the special display setting data 6916.

The payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 is setting data related to the display of the payout rate suitability information of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, from the data for setting the payout rate suitability information display set in the payout rate suitability information display setting table 684 (see FIG. 26), the data display device ID is assigned to the data display device ID based on the device correspondence table 686. The data defined for the corresponding display device ID is extracted and used as the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917.

The model information setting data 6918 is data for setting the game model of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, from the model information setting data defined in the model information setting table 685 (see FIG. 27), the display device ID corresponding to the data display device ID is based on the device correspondence table 686. The specified data is extracted and used as model information setting data 6918.

The game aggregation database 688 is a database in which game aggregation data for each gaming machine 1 aggregated by the game information aggregation unit 613 is stored.

The sales totaling database 689 is a database in which aggregated data related to sales in the gaming machine 1 installed in the store is stored. The sales totaling database 689 stores sales totalization data that aggregates information related to store sales. Data such as the prize amount and the gross profit are aggregated and stored by the sales totaling unit 615.

[2-6. Functional configuration of ball management computer]
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the ball management computer 800.
The ball management computer 800 includes a processing unit 810, an input unit 820, a display unit 830, a communication unit 840, a clock unit 850, and a storage unit 860.

The processing unit 810 is a control device and an arithmetic unit that collectively controls each part of the ball management computer 800 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 860, and is a processor such as a CPU or DSP, an ASIC, or the like. It is configured to have an integrated circuit of.

The input unit 820 is an input means configured to have, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a signal (operation signal) of the pressed key or button to the processing unit 810.

The display unit 830 is a display device that performs various displays based on the display control signal output from the processing unit 810, and includes an LCD and the like. The display unit 830 displays the contents of data of various databases stored in the storage unit 860.

The communication unit 840 is a communication device for communicating with the inter-unit counting unit 500, and includes, for example, a wired communication module for communicating via a wired cable. The communication unit 840 receives the authentication request signal from the inter-unit counting unit 500.

The clock unit 850 is an internal clock included in the ball management computer 800, and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator and a crystal oscillator including an oscillation circuit. The clock time (including the date) of the clock unit 850 is output to the processing unit 810 at any time.

The storage unit 860 stores the ball management program 861 executed as the ball management process by the processing unit 810, the ball holding card management data 865, and the unit management data 867.

The possession card management data 865 is management data of the possession card, for example, the possession card ID given to the possession card possessed by the player and the issue date and time which is the date and time when the possession card was issued. And the number of balls possessed by the player are stored in association with each other.

The unit management data 867 is management data of the inter-unit counting unit 500, and is stored, for example, in association with the ID of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the corresponding data display device 1200 in the unit ID of the inter-unit counting unit 500.

[2-7. Data display device configuration]
[2-7-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance configuration of the data display device 1200.
The data display device 1200 is attached to a lamp plate that can be opened and closed at an upper position on the side surface of the gaming island, and is installed above each gaming machine 1 corresponding to each gaming machine 1.

The data display device 1200 is configured to include a display unit 1230, which is a display means configured with a liquid crystal display, in a central portion. Further, the data display device 1200 includes a left frame LED 1251 and a right frame LED 1252, which are light emitting means, on the left side and the right side when viewed from the player (viewed from the side facing the gaming machine). Specifically, the left frame LED 1251 is provided on the left portion adjacent to the display unit 1230, and the right frame LED 1252 is provided on the right portion adjacent to the display unit 1230. That is, the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 are provided around the display unit 1230.

The left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 are both LED modules in which a large number of LEDs are covered with a lamp cover portion made of a transparent resin material. The light emitters of the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 emit light in a light emitting color designated by the control of the processing unit 1210 and the LED driver 1252 described later. A display unit 1230 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided in the central portion sandwiched between the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252, and a call button 1221 that can be operated by a player is provided in the lower frame portion.

The call button 1221 is a button pressed by a player playing a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 to call a clerk. The call button 1221 is configured so that the store clerk can be called by a pressing operation regardless of whether the data display device 1200 is controlled in either the normal mode or the energy saving mode.

The left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 emit light in the common light emission pattern described above in the normal display, and emit light in the individual light emission pattern described above when the special display is displayed. Further, the display unit 1230 is configured to be able to display the game information on the gaming machine 1, and is configured to be able to display the special display according to the establishment of the special display execution condition.

The data display device 1200 is equipped with a control unit that checks the input status of various signals in the own device, aggregates game information, and controls for executing a big hit running effect. Here, the jackpot running effect is executed by inputting the jackpot running effect signal from the hall computer 600. When the jackpot running effect is executed, the image effect of displaying the character on the display unit 1230 is executed after the light emission effect of causing the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 to emit light is executed.

It should be noted that the jackpot running effect is not limited to the jackpot running effect signal transmitted from the hall computer 600, and the jackpot running effect is performed based on the jackpot running effect signal transmitted from the corresponding gaming machine 1, for example. May be good. Further, the jackpot running effect may be realized by sequentially propagating the jackpot running effect signal between the adjacent data display devices 1200.

Further, the data display device 1200 of the present embodiment is configured to include LEDs, which are light emitting means, on the left side and the right side of the display unit 1230, but the installation position of the light emitting means is not limited to this. For example, LEDs may be installed on the upper side or the lower side of the display unit 1230, or LEDs may be installed at four places on the left side, the right side, the upper side, and the lower side of the display unit 1230.

[2-7-2. Function configuration]
FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the data display device 1200.
The data display device 1200 includes a processing unit 1210, an operation unit 1220, a display unit 1230, a sound output unit 1240, a light emitting unit 1250, a first communication unit 1261, a second communication unit 1262, and a third communication unit. It includes 1263, a short-range wireless communication unit 1265, a clock unit 1275, a power supply unit 1280, and a storage unit 1290.

The processing unit 1210 is a control device and an arithmetic unit that collectively controls each functional unit included in the data display device 1200, and includes a processor such as a CPU or DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC.

The operation unit 1220 is an operation device for the player to perform various operations on the own device, and includes a call button 1221 and a touch panel 1222.

The display unit 1230 is a display device having a display such as an LCD, and displays various information under the control of the processing unit 1210. The touch panel 1222 is integrally configured with the display unit 1230 to form a touch screen.

The sound output unit 1240 is a sound output device including a speaker and the like, and outputs various sounds under the control of the processing unit 1210.

The light emitting unit 1250 is a light emitting device including LEDs and the like, and is provided on the left frame LED 1251 provided on the left housing frame of the display unit 1230 and on the right housing frame of the display unit 1230. It is configured to have a right frame LED 1252.

The first communication unit 1261 is configured to include a wired communication module or the like, and is a communication device for communicating with the corresponding gaming machine 1. The first communication unit 1261 receives the game machine signal from the corresponding game machine 1 and also receives the out signal from the out ball detector 200.

The second communication unit 1262 is a communication device having a wired communication module or the like and for communicating with the corresponding unit 500. The second communication unit 1262 receives a unit signal from the corresponding unit 500.

The third communication unit 1263 is configured to include a wired communication module or the like, and is a communication device for communicating with the hall computer 600. The third communication unit 1263 receives the management device signal and the display device setting data 691 from the hall computer 600.

The short-range wireless communication unit 1265 is configured to include a wireless communication module or the like, and is a communication device for performing short-range wireless communication with a setting remote controller 700 possessed by a store clerk. The short-range wireless communication unit 1265 receives a display-related signal from the setting remote controller 700 for making various display settings including a payout rate suitability information display, selecting display presence / absence, switching the display mode, and the like.

The clock unit 1275 is an internal clock of the data display device 1200, and outputs the time measured (time measured) to the processing unit 1210.

The power supply unit 1280 is a power supply device connected to each functional unit included in the data display device 1200, and supplies electric power to each functional unit of the data display device 1200 according to the control of the power supply control unit 1212.

The storage unit 1290 is a storage device including a memory such as a ROM, EEPROM, and RAM. The storage unit 1290 stores a data display device processing program 1291 that is read out by the processing unit 1210 and executed as display device processing. The data display device processing program 1291 includes, for example, a payout rate index value calculation program 1291a executed as a payout rate index value calculation process and a display processing program 1291b executed as a display process as subroutines.

Further, in the storage unit 1290, the effect data 1293 for the data display device 1200 to perform various effects, the payout rate total data 1295, the game history total data 1297, and the display device setting received from the hall computer 600 are used. Data 691 and are stored.

The payout rate aggregated data 1295 is data in which aggregated values related to the payout rate in the corresponding gaming machine 1 are stored, and an example of the data structure is shown in FIG. 33.
In the payout rate aggregate data 1295, the base, the winning opening, the specified number of prize balls, the number of payouts, the number of outs, the actual payout rate value, and the payout rate error are stored in association with each other.

The base includes "low base" and "high base". However, as described above, strictly speaking, the low base and the high base mean "non-big hit medium and low base state" and "non-big hit medium and high base state", respectively.

For each winning opening, a specified value for the number of winning balls by winning a prize in the winning opening is set for the specified number of prize balls.
The total number of game balls actually paid out to the player by winning each winning opening is stored in the number of payouts. The number of payouts is synonymous with the number of prize balls in the first embodiment.
In the number of outs, the total number of outs calculated based on the out signal transmitted from the out ball detector 200 is stored.
The value (%) obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of outs and multiplying by "100" is stored in the actual payout rate value.
The value (%) obtained by subtracting the payout rate reference value from the actual payout rate value is stored in the payout rate error.

The game history aggregated data 1297 is data that stores the aggregated value of the game history information in the corresponding gaming machine 1.

[2-8. process]
[2-8-1. Hall computer processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a flow of management processing executed by the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 according to the management program 671 stored in the ROM 670.

First, the processing unit 610 executes the processing of the loop A for each of the data display devices 1200 (A1 to A7). The processing of the loop A is a processing executed in order for each data display device 1200.

In the processing of the loop A, the processing unit 610 performs the setting data generation processing according to the setting data generation program 671a stored in the ROM 670 (A1).

Specifically, the setting data generation unit 611 has a display content setting table 681, a display mode setting table 682, a special display setting table 683, and a payout rate suitability information display setting table 684 stored in the hard disk 670. Based on the model information setting table 685 and the device correspondence table 686, the display device setting data 691 for the data display device 1200 is generated by the above-mentioned method. Then, the processing unit 610 stores the generated display device setting data 691 in the RAM 690 (A3).

Next, the processing unit 610 transmits the generated display device setting data 691 to the data display device 1200 (A5). Then, the processing unit 610 shifts the processing to the next data display device 1200.

When the processing of the loop A is completed, the game information totaling unit 613 totals the game data of each game machine 1 and stores it in the game totaling database 688 of the hard disk 680 as the game totaling data (A7).

Next, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not the execution condition of the jackpot running effect is satisfied (A11). The execution condition of the jackpot running effect is to input a jackpot signal from the gaming machine 1 of any model. Then, if it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied (A11; Yes), the jackpot running effect signal is transmitted to the data display device 1200 corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 1 (A13).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution condition of the jackpot running effect is not satisfied (A11; No), the processing unit 610 determines whether or not the execution condition of another type of simultaneous effect is satisfied (A15). If it is determined that the condition is satisfied (A15; Yes), the simultaneous effect signal corresponding to the satisfied execution condition is transmitted to the data display device 1200 (A17).

Although it is different from the present embodiment, when the data display device 1200 performs the simultaneous effect, the clock provided in the data display device 1200 does not perform the simultaneous effect based on the simultaneous effect signal transmitted from the hall computer 600. A simultaneous effect may be performed based on the output result of the unit 1275. For example, the simultaneous effect may be performed every time the elapsed time from the power-on of the data display device 1200 reaches a certain time.

After A13 or A17, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not it is the periodic notification timing (A19). The periodic notification timing can be set as, for example, a timing at regular time intervals (for example, every 3 hours or every 6 hours). If there are a plurality of types of periodical notification contents, the timing for each different time interval may be set as the periodical notification timing.

If it is determined that it is the periodic notification timing (A19; Yes), the processing unit 610 transmits the periodic notification signal to the corresponding data display device 1200 (A21).

Next, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not to end the processing (A23). For example, when the power of the hall computer 600 is turned off at the end of business of the store, it is determined that the process is completed. If it is determined that the processing is to be continued (A23; No), the processing unit 610 returns the processing to A9. If it is determined that the process is to be completed (A23; Yes), the processing unit 610 ends the management process.

[2-8-2. Data display device processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a flow of data display device processing executed by the processing unit 1210 of the data display device 1200 according to the data display device processing program 1291 stored in the storage unit 1290.

First, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not it is the setting timing of the own device (C1). The setting timing can be, for example, the timing when the power of the own device is turned on. In this case, the setting timing may be determined by confirming whether or not the set flag indicating that the display content or the operation content of the own device has been set is set to "ON". The set flag may be set to "ON" after the setting process described later is executed, and may be cleared to "OFF" when the power of the data display device 1200 is turned off at the end of business of the store or the like. ..

When it is determined that it is the setting timing (it is determined that the set flag is "OFF") (C1; Yes), the processing unit 1210 requests the hall computer 600 for the display device setting data 691 and the hall computer 600. The display device setting data 691 is acquired from (C3).

In this case, the data display device 1200 may establish communication with the hall computer 600 to request the display device setting data 691, or the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600 can always communicate with each other. The state may be set and the display device setting data 691 may be automatically distributed from the hall computer 600 to the data display device 1200.

Next, the processing unit 1210 executes the setting process (C5). Specifically, the display device setting data 691 is referred to, the display content to be displayed on the display unit 1230 is determined based on the display content setting data 6914, and the display content is displayed on the display unit 1230 based on the display mode setting data 6915. The display mode to be displayed is determined, and the priority of the special display to be displayed on the display unit 1230 is determined based on the special display setting data 6916. Further, based on the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917, the display unit 1230 determines whether or not the payout rate suitability information is displayed and the display mode. Then, it is possible to make the display unit 1230 perform the display based on the determined content. Further, the processing unit 1210 determines the model information of the corresponding gaming machine 1 based on the model information setting data 6918, and makes it possible to calculate various index values such as a payout rate actual measurement value and a payout rate error.

Next, the processing unit 1210 starts executing the game history total data update process (C7). Specifically, the game history is totaled based on the game machine signal transmitted from the corresponding game machine 1, and the process of updating the game history total data 1297 of the storage unit 1290 is started. More specifically, when a start signal is received, "1" is added to the number of starts to update, and when a big hit signal is received, "1" is added to the number of big hits to update. When the probabilistic change signal and the time saving medium signal are received, "1" is added to the number of probable change big hits to update, and when the time saving medium signal is received without receiving the probabilistic change signal, the normal big hit count is used. Add "1" to update.

Further, the processing unit 1210 starts executing the payout rate total data update process (C9). Specifically, a process of calculating an index value necessary for calculating a payout rate actual measurement value based on a game machine signal transmitted from the corresponding game machine 1 and updating the payout rate aggregate data 1295 of the storage unit 1290. Start.

Specifically, the processing unit 1210 determines the current base state. Specifically, when the time saving medium signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, it is determined that the base state is low. Further, when the time saving medium signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, it is determined that the high base state is obtained.

When the jackpot signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the base state is low, each time the prize ball signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, the payout rate aggregate data 1295 corresponds to the low base state. The first specified number of balls (10 balls) is added to the number of payouts to be made and updated. Further, when the out signal is received from the out ball detector 200, the second specified number of balls (10 balls) is added to the number of outs corresponding to the low base state of the payout rate aggregate data 1295 and updated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the winning ball signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, the high base state of the payout rate aggregate data 1295 is obtained. The first specified number of balls (10 balls) is added to the number of payouts corresponding to the above and updated. Further, when the out signal is received from the out ball detector 200, the second specified number of balls (10 balls) is added to the number of outs corresponding to the high base state of the payout rate aggregate data 1295 and updated.

Next, the processing unit 1210 executes the payout rate index value calculation process according to the payout rate index value calculation program 1291a stored in the storage unit 1290 (C11).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the payout rate index value calculation process.
First, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a non-big hit (E1). Specifically, when the jackpot signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, it is determined that the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in the non-big hit. If it is determined that the player is not in the non-big hit (it is in the big hit) (E1; No), the processing unit 1210 ends the payout rate index value calculation process.

If it is determined that the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a non-big hit (E1; Yes), the processing unit 1210 determines the base state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 (E2). Specifically, when the corresponding gaming machine 1 receives the time saving medium signal, the corresponding gaming machine 1 is determined to be in the high base state, and when the corresponding gaming machine 1 does not receive the time saving medium signal, the corresponding gaming machine 1 is determined to be in the high base state. , The corresponding gaming machine 1 is determined to be in a low base state.

If it is determined that it is in the low base state (E2; low base state), the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not it is the timing for calculating the measured value of the low base payout rate (E3). Here, various timings can be set as the timing for calculating the measured value of the low base payout rate. For example, the timing may be every fixed time (for example, every hour), or the timing may be every time the number of outs stored in the payout rate aggregate data 1295 reaches a certain number (for example, 100 balls). In addition to this, the calculation of the measured value of the payout rate may be instructed to the data display device 1200 via the hall computer 600 or the like by the store manager.

If it is determined that it is the low base payout rate actual measurement value calculation timing (E3; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes the low base payout rate actual measurement value calculation process (E5). Specifically, referring to the payout rate aggregate data 1295, the low base payout rate actual measurement value (%) is obtained by dividing the number of payouts stored in association with the low base state by the number of outs and multiplying by 100. It is calculated and the actual measurement value of the payout rate corresponding to the low base state of the payout rate aggregate data 1295 is updated.

Next, the processing unit 1210 executes a low-based payout rate error calculation process (E7). Specifically, the low base payout rate reference value of the corresponding gaming machine 1 stored in the model information setting data 6918 of the display device setting data 691 is subtracted from the low base payout rate actual measurement value calculated in E5. The low base payout rate error (%) is calculated in, and the payout rate error corresponding to the low base state of the payout rate aggregate data 1295 is updated.

Next, the processing unit 1210 sets the low-based payout rate suitability information display update flag to “ON” (E9). The low-based payout rate suitability information display update flag is a flag indicating that the display of the low-base payout rate suitability information is updated on the display unit 1230, and is set to "OFF" by default. Then, the processing unit 1210 ends the payout rate index value calculation process.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be in the high base state (E2; high base state), the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not it is the timing for calculating the measured value of the high base payout rate (E11). As for the timing of calculating the measured value of the high base payout rate, various timings can be set in the same manner as the timing of calculating the measured value of the low base payout rate.

If it is determined that it is the high base payout rate actual measurement value calculation timing (E11; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes the high base payout rate actual measurement value calculation process (E13). Specifically, referring to the payout rate aggregate data 1295, the high base payout rate actual measurement value (%) is obtained by dividing the number of payouts stored corresponding to the high base state by the number of outs and multiplying by 100. It is calculated and the actual measurement value of the payout rate corresponding to the high base state of the payout rate aggregate data 1295 is updated.

Next, the processing unit 1210 executes a high-based payout rate error calculation process (E15). Specifically, the high base payout rate reference value of the corresponding game machine 1 stored in the model information setting data 6918 of the display device setting data 691 is subtracted from the high base payout rate actual measurement value calculated by E13. The high base payout rate error (%) is calculated in, and the payout rate error corresponding to the high base of the payout rate aggregate data 1295 is updated.

Next, the processing unit 1210 sets the high-based payout rate suitability information display update flag to “ON” (E17). The high-based payout rate suitability information display update flag is a flag indicating that the display of the high-base payout rate suitability information is updated on the display unit 1230, and is set to "OFF" by default. Then, the processing unit 1210 ends the payout rate index value calculation process.

After returning to the data display device processing of FIG. 35 and executing the payout rate index value calculation process, the processing unit 1210 executes the payout rate suitability determination process (C13). Specifically, the actual payout rate value calculated by the payout rate index value calculation process is stored in the model information setting data 6918 of the display device setting data 691. And within the payout rate standard range defined based on the payout rate standard upper limit β, that is, “appropriate” if “α ≦ S ≦ β”, and outside the payout rate standard range, that is, “S <α or β <S”. If there is, it is judged as "inappropriate".

Next, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the appropriateness determination result of the payout rate is appropriate (C15), and if it is determined that it is inappropriate (C15; No), the gaming machine ID of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is used. Output to the hall computer 600 (C17). By doing so, the store manager can grasp the gaming machine 1 whose payout rate may be inappropriate, and opens the glass door frame 3a of the gaming machine 1 to the store clerk. Can be instructed to check the display monitor 26.

After C17, or if the appropriateness determination result of the payout rate is appropriate (C15; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes the display processing according to the display processing program 1291b stored in the storage unit 1290 (C19). ).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the display process.
First, the processing unit 1210 executes the screen display control process (G1). Specifically, the control of switching the display screen is executed according to the operation of switching the display screen being displayed by the player (hereinafter referred to as "screen switching operation").

After that, the processing unit 1210 executes a special display control process (G3). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the special display is satisfied, and if it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied, the special display is displayed on the display unit 1230.

Here, the special display execution condition can be set as follows, for example.

(1) Big hit production display "Big hit signal ON from compatible pachinko gaming machines"

(2) Simultaneous production display "Simultaneous production signal ON from hall computer"

(3) Periodic notification display "Regular notification signal ON from hall computer"

(4) Anti-sticking display (A) "The number of jackpot signals OFF and fluctuations from compatible pachinko gaming machines has reached the specified number."
(B) "Probability change signal ON → OFF from compatible pachinko machine"
(A) is a case where so-called hamari occurs. As the specified number of times, for example, the number of times such as "1000 times" can be set. Since there is a risk that the player will be exposed and continue to play the game and make an excessive investment if a slamming occurs, a squeeze prevention display is executed.
(B) is the case where the probabilistic state is completed. When the probabilistic state ends, it returns to the normal state, and if the game is continued as it is, the player may lose money by consuming the balls that have been earned, so the entanglement prevention display is executed.

(5) Card forgotten display (A) "Driving signal from compatible pachinko machine ON → OFF & specified time elapsed",
(B) "Probability changing signal from compatible pachinko machine ON → OFF & number of possessed balls has reached the specified number of balls"
(A) is a case where a certain time has passed since the player stopped driving the game ball. In this case, the player may be temporarily suspended from the game due to a restroom break or the like. Therefore, in order to prevent the game card from being stolen due to the player forgetting to take the game card and leaving the seat, the card forgotten display is executed. For the specified time, for example, a time such as 1 minute can be set.
(B) is a case where the number of possessed balls is a certain number or more in the state where the probability change state is completed. When the player gets a lot of balls due to the probability change state and the probability change state ends, the card forgotten notification is executed in order to prevent the game card from being stolen and the player suffering a loss. For the specified number of balls, a number of balls such as "10000 shots" can be set.

(6) Game machine error display "Security signal ON from compatible pachinko game machines"

(7) Display device error display "Abnormality detection or fraud detection of own device"

(8) Lending rate display "Detection of lending rate display operation"

Next, the processing unit 1210 executes the payout rate suitability information display control process (G5).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the payout rate suitability information display control process.
First, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the setting of the payout rate suitability information display stored in the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 of the display device setting data 691 is "display" (H1). ), If it is determined to be "display"(H1; Yes), it is determined whether or not the payout rate suitability information display update flag is "ON" (H3).

If it is determined that the payout rate suitability information display update flag is "ON" (H3; Yes), the processing unit 1210 determines the type of the payout rate suitability information display update flag (H5). If it is determined that the type is "low base" (H5; low base), the processing unit 1210 executes the low base payout rate suitability information display update process (H7). Specifically, based on the display mode stored in the display device setting data 691 payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 and the detailed display setting data thereof, the payout rate in the low base state in the display mode is Update the display of suitability information. Then, the processing unit 1210 sets the low-based payout rate suitability information display update flag to “OFF” (H9), and ends the payout rate suitability information display control process.

If it is determined that the type of the payout rate suitability information display update flag is "high base" (H5; high base), the processing unit 1210 executes the high base payout rate suitability information display update process (H11). Specifically, based on the display mode stored in the display device setting data 691 payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 and the detailed display setting data thereof, the payout rate in the high base state in the display mode is Update the display of suitability information. Then, the processing unit 1210 sets the high-based payout rate suitability information display update flag to “OFF” (H13), and ends the payout rate suitability information display control process.

If the process returns to the display process of FIG. 37 and the payout rate suitability information display control process is executed, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not to update the display of the game history information (G7), and if it is determined to update the display. (G7; Yes), the game history display update process for updating the display of the currently displayed game history is executed (G9). Then, the processing unit 1210 ends the display processing.

After returning to the data display device processing of FIG. 35 and executing the display processing, the processing unit 1210 executes the light emitting processing (C21). Specifically, control is performed so that the light emitting unit 1250 (left frame LED 1251 and right frame LED 1252) emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern.

Next, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the special effect execution condition is satisfied (C23). The special effect execution condition can be set as, for example, one of the following conditions.
(1) Received a signal (big hit running effect signal, other types of simultaneous effect signal, periodic notification signal) instructing the execution of the special effect from the hall computer 600.
(2) The simultaneous effect signal is received from the adjacent data display device 1200.

If it is determined that the special effect execution condition is satisfied (C23; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes the special effect process (C25). Specifically, a special effect (big hit running effect, other types of simultaneous effect, periodical notification effect) corresponding to the established special effect execution condition is executed.

Next, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not to end the processing (C27), and if it is determined to continue the processing (C27; No), returns the processing to C1. If it is determined that the processing is finished (C27; Yes), the processing unit 1210 ends the data display device processing.

[2-9. Display screen]
39 to 42 are views showing an example of a display screen displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200.

FIG. 39 (1) is a diagram showing an example of a comprehensive game history screen.
This comprehensive game history screen is a display screen displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 corresponding to the game machine 1 of the model “Pachinko XXX”. On this comprehensive game history screen, as comprehensive game history information, "total number of big hits", "total number of probable variable big hits", "total number of normal normal big hits", "total number of starts", and "total number of payouts" And "Comprehensive jackpot history graph" are displayed.

Further, at the lower left of this comprehensive game history screen, a service icon for the player to select a service and a screen switching icon for switching the screen are displayed. When the service icon is tapped, the display screen is switched to the service selection screen (not shown), and the player can select a service from this service selection screen. Also, by tapping the screen switching icon, the displayed screen can be switched to another screen in sequence.

Further, in the lower right of the comprehensive game history screen, the payout rate suitability information display 1230A in the color change mode is displayed. The payout rate suitability information display 1230A includes two types of base icons, a low base icon indicating a low base state and a high base icon indicating a high base state, and the color of each base icon changes. Individual color change icons are displayed to indicate the suitability of the payout rate. In the low base state, the low base icon is highlighted (the high base icon is not highlighted), and the color of the individual color change icon displayed below it changes to notify the suitability of the low base payout rate actual measurement value. Will be done. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is highlighted (the low base icon is not highlighted), and the color of the individual color change icon displayed below it changes, so that the appropriateness of the measured value of the high base payout rate is appropriate. Is notified.

Here, the color change icon is "green", "S = α or β = S" when the condition of "α <S <β" is satisfied, as shown in the detailed display setting table of FIG. 25, for example. It is set to change to "yellow" when the condition of is satisfied, and to "red" when the condition of "S <α or β <S" is satisfied.

FIG. 39 (2) is a diagram showing another example of the payout rate suitability information display on the comprehensive game history screen.
At the lower right of this comprehensive game history screen, the payout rate suitability information display 1230B in the meter mode is displayed. In the payout rate suitability information display 1230B, an individual meter for displaying the payout rate suitability is displayed corresponding to each of the two types of base icons, the low base icon and the high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is highlighted (the high base icon is not highlighted), and the individual meters displayed below it increase or decrease to notify the suitability of the measured low base payout rate. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is highlighted (the low base icon is not highlighted), and the individual meters displayed below it increase or decrease to notify the suitability of the high base payout rate actual measurement value. ..

The meter display clarifies the payout rate standard range by, for example, dividing a rectangular frame formed in the horizontal direction indicating the payout rate with vertical lines corresponding to the payout rate standard lower limit value and the payout rate standard upper limit value. It is configured as a meter. In the figure, the meter display is a horizontal meter display, but a vertical meter display may be used.

FIG. 39 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the payout rate suitability information display on the comprehensive game history screen.
At the lower right of this comprehensive game history screen, the payout rate suitability information display 1230C in the error mode is displayed. In the payout rate suitability information display 1230C, the payout rate error is individually displayed corresponding to each of the two types of base icons, the low base icon and the high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is highlighted (the high base icon is non-reversed), and the payout rate error is displayed below it, so that the suitability of the measured value of the low base payout rate is notified. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is highlighted (the low base icon is non-reversed), and the payout rate error is displayed below it, so that the suitability of the high base payout rate measured value is notified.

FIG. 40 (1) is a diagram showing another example of the payout rate suitability information display on the comprehensive game history screen.
At the lower right of this comprehensive game history screen, the payout rate suitability information display 1230D in the color change mode is displayed. The payout rate suitability information display 1230D displays the suitability of the payout rate by a color change icon like the payout rate suitability information display 1230A in FIG. 39 (1), but unlike the payout rate suitability information display 1230A. A common color change icon is displayed for the two types of base icons, the low base icon and the high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is lit and displayed (the high base icon is not lit), and the color of the common color change icon changes to notify the suitability of the measured value of the low base payout rate. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is lit and displayed (the low base icon is not lit), and the color of the common color change icon changes to notify the suitability of the measured value of the high base payout rate.

FIG. 40 (2) is a diagram showing another example of the payout rate suitability information display on the comprehensive game history screen.
At the lower right of this comprehensive game history screen, the payout rate suitability information display 1230E in the meter mode is displayed. The payout rate suitability information display 1230E displays the suitability of the payout rate by a meter in the same manner as the payout rate suitability information display 1230B in FIG. 39 (2), but unlike the payout rate suitability information display 1230B, it has a low base. A common meter is displayed for the two types of base icons, the icon and the high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is lit and displayed (the high base icon is not lit), and the common meter increases or decreases to notify the suitability of the measured value of the low base payout rate. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is lit and displayed (the low base icon is not lit), and the common meter is increased or decreased to notify the suitability of the measured value of the high base payout rate.

FIG. 40 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the payout rate suitability information display on the comprehensive game history screen.
At the lower right of this comprehensive game history screen, the payout rate suitability information display 1230F in the error mode is displayed. The payout rate suitability information display 1230E displays the payout rate error in the same manner as the payout rate suitability information display 1230C in FIG. 39 (3), but unlike the payout rate suitability information display 1230C, the low base icon and high The payout rate error is displayed in common for the two types of base icons. In the low base state, the low base icon is lit (the high base icon is not lit) and the low base payout rate error is displayed. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is lit (the low base icon is not lit), and the high base payout rate error is displayed.

FIG. 41 (1) is a diagram showing an example of a special display.
FIG. 41 (1) is a display screen displayed when the execution condition of the big hit effect display is satisfied while the comprehensive game history screen is displayed, and the message “Big hit ♪” and the image of the character are displayed in the center of the screen. The big hit effect display is displayed.

FIG. 41 (2) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
FIG. 41 (2) is a display screen displayed when the execution condition of the game machine error display is satisfied while the comprehensive game history screen is displayed. In the center of the screen, "an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko game machine." The game machine error display with the message "Please call the clerk." Is displayed.

FIG. 41 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
FIG. 41 (3) is a display screen displayed when the execution condition of the display device error is satisfied during the display of the comprehensive game history screen, and in the center of the screen, "an error has occurred in the display device. The display device error display consisting of the message "Please call the clerk." Is displayed.

FIG. 42 (1) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
FIG. 42 (1) is a display screen displayed when the execution condition of the immersive prevention display is satisfied while the comprehensive game history screen is displayed. In the center of the screen, "Be careful not to be too absorbed in the game." The message "Please" is displayed to prevent squeezing.

FIG. 42 (2) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
FIG. 42 (2) is a display screen displayed when the execution condition of the card forgotten display is satisfied while the general game history screen is displayed. The message "." Is displayed for forgetting to remove the card.

FIG. 42 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
FIG. 42 (3) is a display screen displayed when the execution condition of the loan rate display is satisfied while the comprehensive game history screen is displayed. In the center of the screen, "ball lending is 540 yen → 125 balls. The loan rate display consisting of the message "" is displayed.

[2-10. Use]
According to the payout ratio suitability determination displays 1230A to 1230F displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the payout rate of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is appropriate for the player or the employee of the store. It is possible to confirm whether or not it is.

If the player playing the game on the gaming machine 1 checks the display and determines that the payout rate is inappropriate, he presses the call button to call the store clerk and the payout rate is inappropriate. It can be pointed out that there is a possibility. At this time, the store clerk confirms the payout rate suitability information display displayed on the display unit 1230, and if it is determined that the player's indication is appropriate, the glass door frame 3a of the game machine 1 is opened. Check the display monitor 29 (see FIG. 4) provided in the center of the main board 11.

As described in the first embodiment, the winning combination (%) is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and the large winning opening (large winning opening). It is calculated as the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning a prize (attacker). In the present embodiment, as described above, in the calculation of the measured value of the low base payout rate, the prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening and the first starting winning opening (navel) are targeted. Therefore, the low-based payout rate measured value can be estimated as "100 (%)-role ratio (%)", and conversely, the role ratio is "100 (%)-low-based payout rate measured value (%)". Can be estimated as. That is, it can be said that there is a substantial correlation between the payout rate in the non-big hit medium and low base state in the present embodiment and the winning combination described in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, the ratio (%) is calculated as the ratio of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) to the number of prize balls due to winning the big prize opening (attacker). Will be done. That is, the ratio of the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state to the total number of prize balls can be calculated as a continuous ratio.

Here, it is also possible to realize the above-mentioned calculation of the combination ratio / connection ratio in the data display device 1200. In this case, a prize ball counter (game state compatible counter) corresponding to each gaming state (big hit gaming state, low base state, high base state, etc.) of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is configured in the data display device 1200. By adding the number of prize balls to the prize ball counter corresponding to the game state of the game machine 1 when the prize ball signal is received from the corresponding game machine 1, the number of prize balls in each game state is individually counted. Then, based on the count value of the prize ball counter, the winning combination / connection ratio calculation process may be executed to calculate the winning combination / connection ratio.

In this case, the store clerk determines whether or not there is a problem that actually affects the payout rate by referring to the winning combination ratio and the continuous ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 of the corresponding gaming machine 1. be able to. Then, if it is determined that a problem has occurred, the gaming machine 1 can be stopped and then redeveloped (for example, redevelopment of the gaming nails).

[2-11. Action effect]
In the first gaming system 1000A, a data display device 1200 is provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1. The data display device 1200 includes a display unit 1230 which is a display means capable of displaying game information on the corresponding game machine 1. The display unit 1230 is acquired by the player during the non-big hit (during the non-advantageous state) with respect to the number of outs (used game value) which is the game value used by the player during the non-big hit (during the non-advantageous state) in the gaming machine 1. The payout rate standard information (reference relative information), which is information on the standard of the payout rate (relative value), which is the ratio of the number of payouts (acquired game value), which is the game value, and the actual measurement of the payout rate on the corresponding gaming machine 1. It is possible to display the actual measurement value of the payout rate (measured relative value), the payout rate suitability information (specific information) based on the value, and the game history information of the corresponding gaming machine 1.
According to this, it is possible to confirm the payout rate suitability information based on the payout rate standard information regarding the payout rate standard during the non-big hit of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the actual measurement value of the payout rate. As a result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the payout rate of the gaming machine 1 is as designed.

[3. Third Embodiment]
Next, the second gaming system 1000B in the present embodiment will be described.

[3-1. System configuration]
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the second gaming system 1000B.
The second gaming system 1000B, a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on the gaming island, a portable terminal 250 which is a terminal device owned by the user, and a gaming device and information display provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1. A data display device 400, which is a kind of device, an inter-computer counting unit 500, which is a kind of gaming device, a counting device, and a recording medium processing device provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1, and a hall, which is a kind of management device. The computer 600, the ball management computer 800, which is a kind of management device for managing the number of stored balls and the number of balls held by the player, and the server 980, which is a kind of management device for managing the personal game history information of the player. And is configured with.

The mobile terminal 250 is a terminal device owned by a user who visits a store, and includes, for example, a mobile phone (including a smartphone) carried by the user. In the present embodiment, the mobile terminal 250 is equipped with an IC chip for non-contact communication (for example, a FeliCa (registered trademark) chip), and the IC chip is used to contact the data display device 400 in a non-contact manner. It is configured to be able to communicate. Further, the mobile terminal 250 is configured to be able to communicate with the server 980 using a communication network N such as the Internet, and is a code reader for reading a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)). The two-dimensional code displayed on the data display device 400 can be read.

[3-2. Signal and information flow]
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of signals and information between the devices of the second gaming system 1000B. In this figure, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the stand terminal 900 and the server 980 are not shown.

From the gaming machine 1, the gaming machine signal is output to the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600. Further, an out signal is output to the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600 from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1. These signals will be described later.

From the inter-unit counting unit 500, a unit signal including a card insertion signal, a card ejection signal, a deposit signal, a consumption signal, a ball payout signal, a ball counting signal and a unit error signal is output to the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600. NS. These signals are the same as those of the first gaming system 1000A.

From the hall computer 600, display device setting data 691 for the data display device 400 to make various settings is output to the data display device 400. Further, the management device signal is output from the hall computer 600 to the data display device 400. The management device signal includes, for example, a signal such as a running operation effect signal that instructs the data display device 400 to execute the running operation effect described later.

The inter-unit counting unit 500 outputs an authentication request signal for requesting authentication of the ball holding card inserted in the own device to the ball management computer 800. The authentication request signal includes a unit ID which is an ID of the own device and a card ID recorded on the ball possession card.

The ball management computer 800 executes the authentication process according to the authentication request signal output from the inter-unit counting unit 500, and transmits the authentication signal to the inter-unit counting unit 500. The authentication signal includes an authentication result (OK / NG).

The data display device 400 uses the operation to the operation unit 420 or non-contact communication to start the information recording start operation for starting the recording of the personal game history information from the mobile terminal 250 and the information for ending the recording of the personal game history information. It is configured to be able to accept recording end operations. Then, the data display device 400 displays the personal game history information on the liquid crystal display unit 430 by displaying a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) in which access information such as a URL for accessing the server 980 is encoded. It is configured to be able to output identifiable information. Further, the data display device 400 outputs the stored / updated personal game history information to the hall computer 600 in association with the mobile ID of the mobile terminal 250. The personal game history information is an example of personal game information which is a player's individual game information.

The server 980 is a management device installed in the store, and for the player registered as a member in the store, for example, a member ID, a mobile ID which is an ID of a mobile terminal 250 owned by the player, and personal game history information. Manage the data associated with. The server 980 acquires the player's personal game history information stored and updated by the data display device 400 via the hall computer 600, and corresponds the acquired personal game history information with the player's member ID and mobile ID. Attach and memorize. Then, the personal game history information is downloaded to the mobile terminal 250 according to the access from the mobile terminal 250.

[3-3. Data display device]
[3-3-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the external configuration of the data display device 400, in which a front view of the data display device 400 is shown in FIG. 45 (1) and a right side view of the data display device 400 is shown in FIG. 45 (2). Shows.

The data display device 400 has a liquid crystal display unit 430 capable of displaying information about the game of the game machine 1 mainly for the player playing the game on the corresponding game machine 1, and the data display device 400 for the player and other players. It is configured to include a seg display unit 440 capable of displaying information about the game of the game machine 1.

The liquid crystal display unit 430 is a display unit composed of a liquid crystal display formed on a substrate portion on the front surface of the housing of the data display device 400, and is a liquid crystal display based on a conventionally known drive method such as a simple matrix method or an active matrix method. By driving the liquid crystal display by applying the voltage of the sub-pixels of the panel, it is possible to display the information about the game of the corresponding game machine 1 by the liquid crystal display method. The liquid crystal display unit 430 corresponds to the first display unit.

The seg display unit 440 is a display unit composed of a 7-segment display (so-called 7-segment display) formed on the door portion on the side of the housing of the data display device 400, and is conventionally known as a dynamic drive method or a static drive method. By turning on the seg LED based on the drive method, information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 can be displayed by the seg display method. Specifically, the seg display unit 440 is configured to have a large 3-digit 7-segment display, and by lighting these 7-segment displays, information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed. do.

The seg display unit 440 is provided on the right seg display unit 440A formed on the right door portion 403A provided on the right side when viewed from the data display device 400 side and the left door portion 403B provided on the left side when viewed from the data display device 400 side. It is configured to have two display units, the left segment display unit 440B and the formed left segment display unit 440B. The right door portion 403A and the right seg display unit 440A are provided on the left side of the paper surface, and the left door portion 403B and the left seg display unit 440B are provided on the right side of the paper surface. These two seg display units 440 (right seg display unit 440A, left seg display unit 440B) correspond to the second display unit and the third display unit.

The liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 (right seg display unit 440A, left seg display unit 440B) display a display pattern in which they are linked to each other under the control of the processing unit 410 (hereinafter, "liquid crystal seg linked display pattern"). ”) And a display pattern that displays independently of each other (hereinafter referred to as“ liquid crystal seg independent display pattern ”), so that information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The liquid crystal seg linked display pattern corresponds to the first display pattern, and the liquid crystal seg independent display pattern corresponds to the second display pattern.

Further, in addition to the above display pattern, the left and right seg display units 440 (right seg display unit 440A, left seg display unit 440B) display a display pattern linked to each other (hereinafter referred to as "seg linked display pattern"). ) And a display pattern that displays fairly independently (hereinafter referred to as "Seg independent display pattern") are configured to be able to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1.

Further, the data display device 400 irradiates light toward the front region of the gaming machine 1 when the corresponding gaming machine 1 starts controlling the jackpot gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “irradiation effect”). Is configured to be executable. The irradiation effect can be rephrased as a light emission effect.

Here, the front area of the gaming machine 1 means an area on the front side of the installation location of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and covers a part or the whole of the housing of the gaming machine 1. Since the player plays a seated game, the seated player is also included in this front area.

Specifically, the data display device 400 includes a processing unit 410 for executing a process related to the irradiation effect, and a light emitting unit 480 that emits light in the irradiation effect, and causes the light emitting unit 480 to emit light to irradiate the data. Realize the production.

As will be described later, the light emitting unit 480 has a first spot LED 480a to a third spot LED 480c formed on the substrate portion 401A on the front surface of the data display device 400, and a first appeal formed on the door portion 403 of the data display device 400. It is configured to include an LED 480d and a second appeal LED 480e. These light emitting portions 480 are installed so that a spherical frame in which a light emitting body having strong directivity (for example, a bullet-shaped LED) is enclosed is fitted into the base portion 401 and the door portion 403, respectively, and the frame is framed by a motor (not shown). By freely rotating the body, it is configured as a movable body capable of changing the irradiation direction of light by the light emitting body (LED). Since the light irradiation region changes when the light irradiation direction changes, the light emitting unit 480 can change the light irradiation direction and the irradiation region. The light emitting body constituting the light emitting unit 480 may be a light emitting body other than the bullet-shaped LED. Further, a structure different from the structure in which the frame body containing the light emitting body is fitted may be applied.

Further, a speaker as a sound output unit 450 is installed at the lower right of the main body board on the front surface of the data display device 400 so that the sound output port faces the front surface. The installation position of the sound output unit 450 can be appropriately changed in design, and may be installed at any position on the upper surface of the housing or on the side surface of the housing of the data display device 400, for example.

Here, the front and rear directions with respect to the data display device 400 are the front-back direction, the right and left directions with respect to the data display device 400 are the left-right direction, and the upward and downward directions with respect to the data display device 400 are upward and downward. Is defined as the vertical direction.

[3-3-2. Opening and closing mode]
46 and 47 are views for explaining the configuration of the data display device 400 and the opening / closing mode of the door portion, and show a perspective view of the data display device 400.

The housing of the data display device 400 has a base portion 401 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a right door configured to protrude toward the player from the right end portion and the left end portion of the base portion 401, respectively. It is configured to have a portion 403A and a left door portion 403B. The left and right door portions 403 are each designed so that the width thereof is half the width of the base portion 401.

A liquid crystal display unit 430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction is formed on the front surface of the substrate unit 401. The liquid crystal display unit 430 is formed so as to face the player, and the player playing the game with the gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the liquid crystal display unit 430 from the gaming position. That is, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is formed so as to be visible to the player from the game position where the player plays.

On one of the left and right surfaces of the door portion 403, a seg display portion 440 that displays information for the player playing with the gaming machine 1 and surrounding players is formed. In the seg display unit 440, the right seg display unit 440A is formed on the outer surface of the right door portion 403A, and the left seg display unit 440B is formed on the outer surface of the left door portion 403B. While the player can see from the game position, the player cannot see from the game position when the door 403 is open, but the surrounding players (for example, from the edge of the game island to the game island). It is configured to be visible to a player who looks over the game machine 1 and selects the game machine 1 to start the game).

The seg display unit 440 can provide information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 by lighting a large three-digit seg. Therefore, when the door portion 403 is closed, the player playing the game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 can easily see the information displayed on the seg display unit 440, and also passes behind the corresponding gaming machine 1. The information displayed on the seg display unit 440 can be easily visually recognized by the pachinko player as a passerby, and an appealing effect to the passerby can be expected. Further, when the door portion 403 is opened, a player who is at a position away from the own device (for example, a position several meters to 10 meters away from the store) can easily visually recognize the information displayed on the seg display unit 440. It will be possible. Therefore, it can be said that the seg display unit 440 is configured so that the visibility from a distance is higher than that of the liquid crystal display unit 430.

Two first spot LEDs 480a are arranged side by side in the central portion on the upper side of the liquid crystal display unit 430 formed on the front surface of the substrate portion 401, and two second spots in the central portion are arranged on the lower side of the liquid crystal display unit 430. The LEDs 480b are arranged side by side. Further, one third spot LED 480c is arranged at each of the upper and lower ends of the liquid crystal display unit 430. The front surface of the substrate unit 401 is referred to as a first display area, and the LED unit composed of spot LEDs configured in the first display area is referred to as a first display area LED unit 481.

The spot LED is a light emitting body provided to realize an irradiation effect in which a player playing a game with the corresponding game machine 1 is spotted, and the light emitted from the spot LED is referred to as a spotlight. That is, the spot LED is configured to be able to irradiate the front region of the corresponding gaming machine 1 with light in order to spot the corresponding gaming machine 1.

Further, two first appeal LEDs 480d are arranged side by side on the upper side of the seg display unit 440 formed on the front surface of the door portion 403, and two second appeal LEDs 480e are arranged side by side on the lower side of the seg display unit 440. Has been done. The front surface of the door portion 400A is referred to as a second display area, and the LED portion made of the appeal LED configured in the second display area is referred to as a second display area LED portion 482.

The appeal LED is a light emitting body provided to realize an irradiation effect that appeals the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 corresponding to the player playing the game with the surrounding gaming machine 1 or the player watching the game. The light emitted from the appeal LED is called an appeal light. That is, the appeal LED is configured to be able to irradiate the peripheral area of the corresponding gaming machine 1 with light in order to appeal the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 to the surrounding players.

Further, the first display area LED unit 481 and the second display area LED unit 482 are connected to the drive unit unit 483 having the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b, respectively, and the LED drive unit 483a based on the light emission control signal from the processing unit 410. The LED is made to emit light according to the light emission control, and the frame body can be rotated according to the motor control of the motor drive unit 483b by the drive control signal from the processing unit 410.

The left and right door portions 403 are configured so that they can be folded and stored inward. Specifically, the left and right door portions 403 (right door portion 403A, left door portion 403B) can rotate in both front and rear directions with the left and right hinge portions 405 (right hinge portion 405A, left hinge portion 405B) as axes, respectively. It is configured in. Since the seg display unit 440 also rotates integrally when the door portion 403 is rotated, rotating the door portion 403 means rotating the seg display unit 440. In the present embodiment, the data display device 400 executes an operation effect by rotating the seg display unit 440.

The seg display unit 440 is configured to be rotatable, which means that the seg display unit 440 is movable. Further, since the relative position of the seg display unit 440 is changed by rotating the seg display unit 440, it means that the seg display unit 440 can be displaced. Therefore, the above-mentioned motion effect can be paraphrased as a movable effect, a rotation effect, and a displacement effect.

The left and right door portions 403 are designed so that their widths are half the width of the base portion 401 excluding the hinge portion 405, and when the left and right door portions 403 are closed, they are in a state of just overlapping with the base portion 401. At this time, the left and right door portions 403 are parallel to the base portion 401, and the liquid crystal display portion 430 is covered with the left and right door portions 403. In this way, since the left and right doors 403 can be folded inward, the left and right doors 403 are folded when the data display device 400 is installed on the game island or removed from the game island. Installation work and removal work can be easily performed. On the other hand, the height of the door portion 403 is designed so that only the liquid crystal display portion 430 is covered with the left and right door portions 403 closed, and even when the left and right door portions 403 are closed. , The appeal LED is not covered.

The left and right door portions 403 are configured to be automatically openable (single-open, double-open), for example, by driving a drive device having a stepping motor or the like configured in the hinge portion 405. Specifically, a pulse signal is output to a pulse oscillator connected to the stepping motor according to the control of the processing unit 410, and the rotation angle of the stepping motor is controlled by this pulse signal, so that the left and right door units 403 are at an arbitrary angle. It is configured so that it can be rotated to. The method (structure, mechanism, control) for realizing the opening and closing of the left and right door portions 403 is not limited to the above method, and various conventionally known methods can be applied.

Further, the seg display unit 440 cannot be visually recognized by the player because it is directed to the side surface when the door unit 403 is open, but it is visible to the player because it is directed to the front surface when the door unit 403 is closed. As described above, in the data display device 400, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is visible to the player, but the seg display unit 440 is invisible to the player (on the other hand, the player other than the player can see it). (A state in which the seg display unit 440 is perpendicular to the liquid crystal display unit 430) is possible, and the liquid crystal display unit 430 is invisible to the player, but the seg display unit 440 is visible to the player. It is also possible to set the second state (the state in which the seg display unit 440 is parallel to the liquid crystal display unit 430).

In the following description, for each of the left and right door portions 403, the state in which the door portion 403 is closed so as to cover the liquid crystal display unit 430 is defined as the opening / closing angle “0 degree”, and the door portion 403 is changed from this 0 degree state. The opening / closing angle increases in the positive direction as the door is opened outward, and the state in which the door portion 403 is opened vertically to the front side (player side) is described as the state of the opening / closing angle "90 degrees".

FIG. 46 (1) is a diagram showing an opening / closing mode A. The opening / closing mode A is a state in which the left and right door portions 403 have an opening / closing angle of “90 degrees”, respectively.

FIG. 46 (2) is a diagram showing an opening / closing mode B. The opening / closing mode B is a state in which the left and right door portions 403 have an opening / closing angle of “0 degrees”, respectively.

FIG. 47 (1) is a diagram showing an opening / closing mode C. The opening / closing mode C is a state in which the right door portion 403A is set to "0 degrees" and the left door portion 403B is set to "90 degrees".

FIG. 47 (2) is a diagram showing an opening / closing mode D. The opening / closing mode D is a state in which the right door portion 403A is set to "90 degrees" and the left door portion 403B is set to "0 degrees".

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the display unit of the data display device 400 corresponding to each of the above-mentioned opening / closing modes.

FIG. 48 (1) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode corresponding to the opening / closing mode A.
In the opening / closing mode A, since the left and right door portions 403 are in a state where the opening / closing angle is “90 degrees”, the entire liquid crystal display unit 430 is visible to the player. In this case, it is preferable that the liquid crystal display unit 430 displays information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 that should be preferentially notified to the player (information that is highly important to the player). Is. On the other hand, the left and right seg display units 440 are not visible to the player, but are visible to the surrounding players, so that the information is related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. It is preferable to display different information (information that is less important to the player) and information that enhances the advertising effect / appeal effect.

In FIG. 48 (1), the number of big hits (total number of big hits, probability variable big hits, normal big hits), the number of balls held by the player, the big hit history graph, the ball ejection graph, etc. in the corresponding game machine 1 are displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. An example is shown in which the game history information including the information of is displayed. The display pattern in this case corresponds to an independent display pattern in which the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 display independently.

FIG. 48 (2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode corresponding to the opening / closing mode B.
In the opening / closing mode B, since the left and right door portions 403 are in a state where the opening / closing angle is “0 degrees”, the entire liquid crystal display unit 430 is covered by the door portion 403, and the seg display unit 440 is visually recognized by the player. It will be possible. In this case, the left and right seg display units 440 are to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 that should be preferentially notified to the player (information that is highly important to the player). Then, it is suitable. On the other hand, since the liquid crystal display unit 430 is obscured and cannot be visually recognized, it is not necessary to display the information on the liquid crystal display unit 430.

FIG. 48 (2) shows an example in which numerical information corresponding to the number of balls owned by a player playing on the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed on the left and right seg display units 440. Specifically, an example is shown in which the lower three digits of the number of balls held are displayed on the left seg display unit 440B, and the upper two digits of the number of balls held are displayed on the right seg display unit 440A. This display pattern is a seg-linked display pattern in which the left and right seg display units 440 perform linked display. However, since the display is independent between the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440, the relationship between the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 is a liquid crystal seg independent display pattern.

FIG. 48 (3) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode corresponding to the opening / closing mode C.
In the opening / closing mode C, since the right door portion 403A is set to "0 degrees" and the left door portion 403B is set to "90 degrees", the left half region of the liquid crystal display unit 430 is on the right. It is covered by the door portion 403A, and the area on the right half is exposed when facing the front. In this case, the exposed areas of the right-seg display unit 440A and the liquid crystal display unit 430 are information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1, and information that should be preferentially notified to the player (importance for the player). It is preferable to display high information). On the other hand, the left seg display unit 440B cannot be visually recognized by the player, but can be visually recognized by the surrounding players. Therefore, the information regarding the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is the right seg display unit 440A and the liquid crystal display unit 430. It is preferable to display information that is different from the information displayed on the machine (information that is less important to the player) and information that enhances the advertising effect and appeal effect.

FIG. 48 (3) shows an example in which numerical information corresponding to the number of balls owned by a player playing on the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed on the right segment display unit 440A and the liquid crystal display unit 430. Specifically, an example is shown in which the lower two digits of the number of balls held are displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the upper three digits of the number of balls held are displayed on the right segment display unit 440A. This display pattern is a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern in which the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the right seg display unit 440A perform a linked display.

FIG. 48 (4) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode corresponding to the opening / closing mode D.
In the opening / closing mode D, since the right door portion 403A is set to "90 degrees" and the left door portion 403B is set to "0 degrees", the right half area of the liquid crystal display unit 430 is on the left. It is covered by the door portion 403B, and the area on the left half is exposed when facing the front. In this case, the exposed areas of the left-seg display unit 440B and the liquid crystal display unit 430 are information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1, and information that should be preferentially notified to the player (importance for the player). It is preferable to display high information). On the other hand, the right seg display unit 440A cannot be visually recognized by the player, but can be visually recognized by the surrounding players. Therefore, the information regarding the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is the left seg display unit 440B and the liquid crystal display unit 430. It is preferable to display information that is different from the information displayed on the machine (information that is less important to the player) and information that enhances the advertising effect and appeal effect.

FIG. 48 (4) shows an example in which numerical information corresponding to the number of balls owned by a player playing on the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed on the left segment display unit 440B and the liquid crystal display unit 430. Specifically, an example is shown in which the lower three digits of the number of balls held are displayed on the left segment display unit 440B and the upper two digits of the number of balls held are displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. This display pattern is a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern in which the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the left seg display unit 440B perform a linked display.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a cover body detachably configured on the seg display unit 440.
The seg display unit 440 is configured so that a transparent plastic lid 447 that covers the entire seg display unit 440 can be attached and detached. The display surface of the seg display unit 440 protrudes from the housing surface when the door portion 403 is open (the door portion 403 on the right side protrudes to the right side, and the door part 403 on the left side protrudes to the left side). An outward fitting step portion 441 is provided so as to form a step between the housing surface of the seg display unit 440 and the display surface of the seg display unit 440.

The plastic lid 447 shown in this figure is a lid member having a peripheral wall 443 projecting from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom plate 442, and has a tray shape in which the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 are integrally formed of a translucent plastic material. Have. An inward fitting step portion 444 is provided to form a step between the surface on the side where the peripheral wall 443 of the bottom plate 442 is projected and the end surface (tray-shaped edge surface) of the peripheral wall 443, and the inward fitting step portion 444 is provided. By mating the joint step portion 444 with the outward fitting step portion 441, the inner surface of the inward fitting step portion 444 is engaged with the outer surface of the outward fitting step portion 441, and the plastic lid 447 and the plastic lid 447 It is configured to be integrated with the seg display unit 440.

Further, the recess formed by the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 of the plastic lid 447 is configured to be capable of inserting a POP advertisement 445 for notifying the player of various information. In the POP advertisement 445, for example, information on the business of the store in which the gaming machine 1 is installed and information on the event held in the store can be posted.

In this figure, as an example of the POP advertisement 445, the POP advertisement 445 indicating that the day is Ladies' Day, which is one of the event days, is shown. With the POP advertisement 445 inserted in the recess of the plastic lid 447, when the inward fitting step portion 444 is fitted to the outward fitting step portion 441 of the door portion 403, the POP advertisement 445 becomes the bottom plate 442. It is supported by being sandwiched between the display surface of the seg display unit 440 and covers the display screen of the seg display unit 440.

Further, since the plastic lid 447 has translucency, the inserted POP advertisement 445 can be visually recognized by the player from the outside through the bottom plate 442. The gaming machine 1 in which the POP advertisement 445 for Ladies' Day is displayed on the corresponding data display device 400 is a female-only stand, and only females can play the game.

The POP advertisement is not limited to the above-mentioned event day announcement, and for example, new machine information indicating that the game machine 1 to which the data display device 400 is installed is a new machine, or the game machine 1 is 4. It is possible to post various types of information such as yen pachinko, 2-yen pachinko, and information indicating that the game machine 1 is a 1-yen pachinko machine, and information indicating the model name of the gaming machine 1.

By making it possible to attach the plastic lid 447 to the seg display unit 440 in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information for players other than the player. Further, by attaching the plastic lid 447 with the POP advertisement interposed therebetween, the surrounding players can confirm the information about the store and the game machine 1. Further, when the seg display unit 440 is covered with the POP advertisement or the like in this way to indicate that the seg display unit 440 is in a latent probability change state, the display can be displayed to the player as well as a game other than the player. When you do not want to show it to the customer, you can make the display itself of the seg display unit 440 invisible.

Here, in order to set so that the seg display unit 440 does not display the latent probability change state, the hall computer 600 or each data display device 400 side indicates that the seg display unit 440 is in the latent probability change state. It is necessary to perform setting processing to prevent it from being displayed. On the other hand, by covering the seg display unit 440 with a cover such as a POP advertisement, such a setting process is not required, and the seg display unit 440 may be displayed in a latent probability change state. However, this can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player and the player other than the player.

Further, for example, on an event day such as Ladies' Day, even if the POP advertisement or the like is removed so that the seg display unit 440 can be visually recognized only for the player (for example, a female customer) who is the target of the event. good. Further, when a player (for example, a female customer) who is the target of such an event plays a game, the door portion 403 is folded inward after removing the POP advertisement or the like (second state described above). After making the seg display unit 440 visible to the player, the seg display unit 440 may display the latent probability change state. According to this, only a specific player such as an event target person can visually recognize the display contents of the seg display unit 440.

In FIG. 49, the plastic lid 447 is illustrated as a covering body for covering the seg display unit 440 of the data display device 400, but the covering body is not limited to this. If the cover is a lid, it is not limited to the plastic lid 447, but may be a glass lid or a wooden lid. Further, as the covering body other than the lid, the eaves surrounding the seg display unit 440 may be used as the covering body according to the present invention. The eaves can be, for example, colored plastic, vinyl or wooden eaves.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the eaves in this case.
The door portion 403 in which the seg display portion 440 is formed is configured to have a detachable eaves 448 so as to surround the entire door portion 403. Specifically, the eaves 448 formed in a U-shape in front view so as to surround the surface of the door portion 403 other than the adhesive surface of the hinge portion 405 is configured to be attachable to the door portion 403. By attaching such an eaves 448 to the door portion 403, it is possible to create a state in which the seg display portion 440 is further invisible to the player playing the game with the gaming machine.

The eaves 448 may have a bottomed structure having a bottom portion surrounding the inner surface of the door portion 403, or a bottomless structure having no bottom portion. When the bottomed structure is adopted, the inner surface of the door portion 403 is also surrounded by the eaves 448, so that even the inner surface of the door portion 403 cannot be visually recognized by the player, as if the player. Can create a state as if it were isolated.

Further, the above-mentioned covering body does not necessarily have to be a covering body covering the entire seg display unit 440, and may be a covering body covering a part of the seg display unit 440. For example, it may be a covering body that covers only the central portion of the seg display unit 440, or may be a covering body that covers the right half, the left half, the upper half, and the lower half of the seg display unit 440. Further, it may be used as a covering body that covers the periphery of the seg display unit 440.

In this case, the content displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of the above embodiment may be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400. Further, other information may be displayed on the seg display unit 440 of the data display device 400.

[3-3-3. Function configuration]
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the data display device 400.
The data display device 400 includes a processing unit 410, an operation unit 420, a liquid crystal display unit 430, a seg display unit 440, a door rotation control unit 445, a sound output unit 450, a first communication unit 461, and a first unit. It includes two communication units 462, a third communication unit 463, a non-contact communication unit 464, a short-range wireless communication unit 465, a clock unit 470, a light emitting unit 480, a storage unit 490, and a power supply unit 495. It is composed of.

The processing unit 410 is a control device and an arithmetic unit that collectively control each functional unit included in the data display device 400, and includes a processor such as a CPU or DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC.

The operation unit 420 is an operation device for the player to perform various operations on the own device. For example, a call button 421 for calling a clerk, an operation stop button 422 for stopping the operation effect, and an irradiation effect. It is configured to have a light emitting stop button 423 for stopping the light emission and a touch panel 425. The operation stop button 422 and the light emission stop button 423 are buttons for stopping each effect when the player feels that the operation effect or the irradiation effect is troublesome.

In addition to the above, for example, on the menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430, the player changes various settings related to the operation effect and the irradiation effect (whether or not the effect is executed, adjustment of the mode of the effect, etc.). May be possible to do.

The liquid crystal display unit 430 is a display device including a liquid crystal display, and displays various information on a liquid crystal display under the control of the processing unit 410. The touch panel 425 is integrally configured with the liquid crystal display unit 430 to form a touch screen.

The seg display unit 440 is a display device including a 7-segment display and the like, and displays various information in seg under the control of the processing unit 410. The seg display unit 440 has a right seg display unit 440A and a left seg display unit 440B.

The door rotation control unit 445 is a control device for rotating the door unit 403 on which the seg display unit 440 is formed, and controls a drive device (stepping motor or the like) connected to the right door unit 403A to the right. The right door rotation control unit 445A that controls the rotation of the door unit 403A and the left door unit 403B that controls the drive device (stepping motor, etc.) connected to the left door unit 403B to rotate the left door unit 403B. It has a door rotation control unit 445B.

The sound output unit 450 is a sound output device including a speaker and the like, and outputs various sounds under the control of the processing unit 410. The sound output unit 450 outputs sounds, sound effects, and the like according to the type of motion effect to be executed in the motion effect described later.

The first communication unit 461 is configured to include a wired communication module or the like, and is a communication device for communicating with the corresponding gaming machine 1. The first communication unit 461 receives the game machine signal from the corresponding game machine 1 and also receives the out signal from the out ball detector 200.

The second communication unit 462 is a communication device having a wired communication module or the like and for communicating with the corresponding unit 500. The second communication unit 462 receives the unit signal from the corresponding unit 500.

The third communication unit 463 is configured to include a wired communication module or the like, and is a communication device for communicating with the hall computer 600. The third communication unit 463 receives the management device signal and the display device setting data 691 from the hall computer 600.

The non-contact communication unit 464 is a communication device for performing non-contact communication with the mobile terminal 250 owned by the user. The non-contact communication unit 464 has an IC reader / writer (not shown) provided at a predetermined position (for example, the lower part of the substrate unit 401) on the front surface of the data display device 400.
By detecting that the mobile terminal 250 is held by this IC reader / writer, it is possible to accept an information recording start operation for starting recording of personal game history information and an information recording end operation for ending recording of personal game history information. It is configured in.

In addition, instead of accepting the information recording start operation and the information recording end operation by non-contact communication, a reception button for accepting these operations is configured in the operation unit 420, and the reception button is pressed by pressing the reception button. The information recording start operation and the information recording end operation may be accepted. Further, even if a reception icon for accepting an operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 integrally configured with the touch panel 425, and the information recording start operation and the information recording end operation are accepted by the touch operation of the reception icon. good.

The short-range wireless communication unit 465 is configured to include a wireless communication module or the like, and is a communication device for performing short-range wireless communication with a setting remote controller 700 possessed by a store clerk. The short-range wireless communication unit 465 is configured to be able to make various settings based on the setting signal transmitted from the setting remote controller 700.

The clock unit 470 is an internal clock of the data display device 400 having an RTC (real-time clock), a power-on timer, and the like, and outputs timekeeping information to the processing unit 410. The timed information includes a timed time, which is the time taken, and a timed time, which is the time taken.

The light emitting unit 480 is a light emitting device including an LED or the like, and includes a first display area LED unit 481, a second display area LED unit 482, and a drive unit unit 483.

As described above, the first display area LED unit 481 includes a first spot LED 480a, a second spot LED 480b, and a third spot LED 480c. Further, the second display area LED unit 482 includes a first appeal LED 480d and a second appeal LED 480e.

Further, as described above, the drive unit unit 483 includes the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b.

The power supply unit 495 is a power supply device connected to each functional unit included in the data display device 400, and supplies electric power to each functional unit of the data display device 400.

The storage unit 490 is a storage device having a memory such as a ROM, EEPROM, and RAM, and stores various programs and various data executed by the processing unit 410. The storage unit 490 stores a data display device processing program 491 that is read out by the processing unit 410 as a program and executed as a data display device processing.

The data display device processing program 491 includes a payout rate index value calculation program 491a executed as a payout rate index value calculation process, a display process program 491b executed as a display process, and an operation effect program 491c executed as an operation effect process. And the irradiation effect program 491d executed as the irradiation effect processing, and the personal game history information recording program 491e executed as the individual game history information recording process are included as subroutines.

Further, in the storage unit 490, as data, the production data 493, the payout rate total data 495, the personal game history information recording table 496, the personal game history information recording data 497, and the number of balls possessed data 498 are stored. Display device setting data 691 is stored.

The effect data 493 includes images (still images, moving images, etc.) and sounds (still images, moving images, etc.) for the data display device 400 to perform various effects (big hit running effect, simultaneous effect, periodic notification effect, motion effect, irradiation effect, etc.). It is data of voice, music, etc.).

The payout rate aggregated data 495 is data that stores aggregated values related to the payout rate in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and its data structure is the same as that of the payout rate aggregated data 1295.

The personal game history information recording table 496 is a table in which conditions and the like for recording personal game history information are set, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. 52.
In the personal game history information recording table 496, the recording flag, the condition, and the processing are stored in association with each other.

The recording flag is a flag set in association with the condition, and a value of "0" to "6" is set.
The condition is a condition for setting the corresponding recording flag.
The process is a process to be executed when the corresponding recording flag is set.

This will be described in detail.
For the recording flag "0", "other than the conditions of recording flags 1 to 6" is defined as a condition, and "-(none)" is defined as a process.
The recording flag "1" is defined as "there is an information recording start operation" as a condition, and "reading of personal game history information & setting the recording flag 2" as a process.

The recording flag "2" is defined as "preparing to start information recording" as a condition and "displaying the preparing screen & setting the recording flag 3" as the process. The information recording start preparation process is a process for preparing to start recording the personal game history, and includes a login process for logging in to the data display device 400. The information recording start preparation process will be described as requiring a certain time (for example, about 10 seconds) to complete.

The recording flag "3" is defined as "information is being recorded" as a condition and "update personal game history information" as a process.
The recording flag "4" is defined as "there is an information recording end operation" as a condition, and "stop updating the personal game history information & set the recording flag 5" as a process.

The recording flag "5" is defined as "preparing for information recording end" as a condition and "displaying the preparing screen & setting the recording flag 6" as a process. The information recording end preparation process is a process for preparing to end the recording of the personal game history, and includes a logout process for logging out from the data display device 400. Similar to the information recording start preparation process, the information recording end preparation process will be described as requiring a certain time (for example, about 10 seconds) to complete.

The recording flag "6" is defined as "at the end of information recording" as a condition and "output information that can specify personal game history information & set recording flag 0" as a process. The information that can specify the personal game history information is, for example, access information such as a URL for accessing the server 980 from the mobile terminal 250.

The personal game history information data 497 is data that records personal game history information in the corresponding game machine 1, and is updated at any time by the processing unit 410 in the personal game history information recording process executed according to the personal game history information recording program 491e. NS.

The number of balls held data 498 is data on the number of balls held by a player playing a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1, and is updated based on the ball payout signal and the ball counting signal output from the inter-unit counting unit 500. ..

The display device setting data 691 is data for setting the own device acquired from the hall computer 600.

[3-4. Hall computer]
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the configuration of the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 600 in the second gaming system 1000B.
In addition to the above-mentioned data and tables, the hard disk 680 stores an effect setting table 687.

The effect setting table 687 is a table for setting the effect executed by the data display device 400, and includes an open / close setting table 6871, an operation effect setting table 6872, and an irradiation effect setting table 6873. ..

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the open / close setting table 6871.
The opening / closing mode, the opening / closing of the right seg display unit 440A, and the opening / closing of the left seg display unit 440B are stored in the open / close setting table 6871 in association with each other. In the opening / closing mode, the above-mentioned opening / closing modes A to D are stored, and the opening / closing of the right seg display unit 440A and the left seg display unit 440B corresponding to the respective opening / closing modes is stored. The open / close setting table 6871 is used to initially set the open / close state of the data display device 400 and to change the open / close state setting.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the operation effect setting table 6872.
In the operation effect setting table 6872, operation effect setting data is stored for each game machine ID which is the ID of the game machine 1 and its model name. In each operation effect setting data, the effect type setting data is stored in association with the gaming machine ID and the model name.

The effect type setting data is data for setting the type of operation effect to be executed by the data display device 400 provided corresponding to the game machine ID and the game machine 1 of the model name, and is an effect number. Priority is an index value for which operation effect is preferentially executed when the type No and the execution conditions set for the operation effects of a plurality of types are simultaneously satisfied and the operation effects to be executed conflict with each other. The degree, the content of the effect type, which is the content of the corresponding effect type, and the execution condition, which is the condition for executing the corresponding effect type, are stored in association with each other. In the operation effect setting data at the top of FIG. 55, the numbers "0" to "5" are stored as the effect type No.

This will be described in detail.
In the effect type No. "0", "-(none)" is defined as the priority, "-(none)" is defined as the effect type content, and "-(none)" is defined as the execution condition. This means that the setting does not cause the data display device 400 to execute the operation effect.

The effect type No. "1" is defined as "5" as the priority, "number of balls operation effect" as the effect type content, and "reception of the probability changing signal from the corresponding gaming machine" as the execution condition. Has been done. The number of balls possessed motion effect is an motion effect executed based on the number of balls possessed by the player playing the game on the corresponding gaming machine 1, and is triggered by the fact that the corresponding gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probabilistic gaming state. It means that the data display device 400 executes the ball holding number operation effect.

The effect type No. "2" is defined as "4" as the priority, "big hit operation effect" as the effect type content, and "received a big hit signal from the corresponding gaming machine" as the execution condition. .. The jackpot motion effect is an motion effect executed based on the occurrence of a jackpot in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the data display device 400 triggers the jackpot motion effect when the corresponding gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Means to execute.

In the effect type No. "3", "3" is defined as the priority, "countdown operation effect" is defined as the effect type content, and "the time is the countdown start time" is defined as the execution condition. The countdown operation effect is an operation effect that notifies the player of the time until a specific event occurs by a countdown.

Here, as the specific event to be the target of the countdown operation effect, for example, it can be defined as an event such as the start of the simultaneous operation effect or the closing of the store. Specifically, it is possible to notify the player by counting down the time until the next simultaneous operation effect is started and the remaining time until the closing time of the store.

In addition, depending on the store, there are stores that apply a so-called quantitative system to play games. The quantitative system is a continuous game when the game value (the number of balls acquired in a pachinko machine and the number of medals acquired in a slot machine) acquired by a player playing a game on a gaming machine reaches the upper limit of the quantitative value. It means restricted operations. Further, the operation of limiting the game in this case means an operation of resetting and stopping the game state even if the game state of the gaming machine is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is decided to apply the quantitative system to the game in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the occurrence of the stop is regarded as a specific event, and the number of remaining balls until the game is stopped in the corresponding game in the game machine 1 (until the stop). The number of balls that can be acquired by the player) may be notified to the player by a countdown operation effect.

Further, in a store to which the above-mentioned quantitative system is applied, it is conceivable to apply an operation in which a player is allowed to play a game by setting a time zone for opening the quantitative system as an operation method of the quantitative system. Therefore, the opening of the fixed-quantity system and the cancellation of the fixed-quantity system are set as specific events, and the remaining time until the fixed-quantity system is released and the remaining time until the fixed-quantity system is released are notified to the player by the countdown operation effect. May be good.

In the effect type No. "4", "2" is defined as the priority, "running operation effect" is defined as the effect type content, and "the running effect signal is received from the hall computer" is defined as the execution condition. For the running motion effect, one of the game machines 1 with the same model name wins a big hit with the design of "777" and the number of consecutive villas is the specified number (10 stations, 20 stations, 30 stations, etc.) It is an operation effect executed based on winning a specific big hit such as winning a big hit, and the data display device 400 runs when the hall computer 600 instructs the execution of the running operation effect. It means to execute the motion effect.

The effect type No. "5" is defined as "1" as a priority, "simultaneous operation effect" as an effect type content, and "timekeeping time has become a simultaneous effect start time" as an execution condition. .. The simultaneous operation effect is an operation effect that is simultaneously executed on the data display device 400 corresponding to the game machine 1 having the same model name, and the data is triggered by the time counting time of the clock unit 470 becoming the simultaneous effect start time. It means that the display device 400 executes the simultaneous operation effect.

Further, in the operation effect setting data, data corresponding to the operation effect of each effect type defined in the above effect type setting data is stored. In the operation effect setting data at the top of FIG. 55, the number of balls held for the operation effect setting is as data corresponding to each of the effect type Nos. "1" to "5" of the effect type setting data. The data, the data for the jackpot operation effect setting, the data for the countdown operation effect setting, the data for the running operation effect setting, and the data for the simultaneous operation effect setting are stored.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the above-mentioned operation effect setting data.
FIG. 56 (1) is a diagram showing an example of data for setting the number of balls held, the opening / closing order, the number of consecutive villas, the opening / closing mode, and each display unit (right segment display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left). The display mode of the seg display unit) is defined in association with the display mode.

The opening / closing order is an order in which the left and right door portions 403 of the data display device 400 are opened / closed.
The number of consecutive villas is the total number of times the probabilistic jackpot is won in the probabilistic gaming state that is transferred after that, with the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition from the normal state to the probabilistic gaming state in the gaming machine 1 as the first time. The number of times the probabilistic jackpot was won).
The opening / closing mode is the opening / closing mode A to D of the door portion 403 of the data display device 400 defined in the opening / closing mode setting table 6871.
The display mode of each display unit is a mode in which the number of balls held is displayed on each of the right-segment display unit, the liquid crystal display unit, and the left-segment display unit of the data display device.

This will be described in detail.
The opening / closing order is defined as the fifth order from "1" to "5".
In the opening / closing order "1", the number of consecutive villas "1 to 3 stations", the opening / closing mode "A", the right segment display unit "all digits of the number of balls held", and the liquid crystal display unit "all digits of the number of balls held" However, the left seg display section "all digits of the number of balls held" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "2", the number of consecutive villas "4 to 6", the opening / closing mode "B", the right segment display "remaining number of balls", and the liquid crystal display "-(none)" , The left segment display section "up to the last 3 digits of the number of balls held" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "3", the number of consecutive villas "7 to 9", the opening / closing mode "C", the right segment display "remaining digits of the number of balls", and the liquid crystal display "last 2 digits of the number of balls" Up to ", and the left segment display section" all digits of the number of balls held "are defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "4", the number of consecutive villas "10 to 19 stations", the opening / closing mode "D", the right segment display unit "all digits of the number of balls held", and the liquid crystal display unit "remaining digits of the number of balls held" However, the left segment display section "up to the last 3 digits of the number of balls held" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "5", the number of consecutive villas "20 or more", the opening / closing mode "A", the right segment display unit "all digits of the number of balls held", and the liquid crystal display unit "all digits of the number of balls held" are displayed. The left seg display section "all digits of the number of balls held" is defined respectively.

For the above-mentioned data for setting the number of balls held, the data display device 400 may execute an operation effect of changing the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in five stages according to the number of consecutive villas in the corresponding gaming machine 1. It has been decided. The number of consecutive villas can be determined based on the jackpot signal and the probability changing signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

FIG. 56 (2) is a diagram showing an example of data for setting a big hit operation effect, and shows an opening / closing order, a big hit round, an opening / closing mode, and each display unit (right seg display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left seg display unit). ) Is associated with the display mode. The jackpot round is a round (R) in the jackpot gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1.

This will be described in detail.
The opening / closing order is defined as the fifth order from "1" to "5".
In the opening / closing order "1", the jackpot round "1R to 3R", the opening / closing mode "A", the right segment display unit "probability change jackpot count full digit", and the liquid crystal display section "big hit count (total, probability variation, normal)""Alldigits" is defined as the left segment display unit "normal number of big hits all digits".

In the opening / closing order "2", the jackpot round "4R-6R", the opening / closing mode "D", the right segment display "probability change jackpot count full digit", and the liquid crystal display "total jackpot count remaining digit" are on the left. The seg display unit "up to the last digit of the total number of big hits" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "3", the jackpot round "7R-9R", the opening / closing mode "B", the right segment display "probability variation jackpot count full digit", and the liquid crystal display "-(none)" are the left segment. The display unit "normally all digits of the number of big hits" is defined.

In the opening / closing order "4", the jackpot round "10R-12R", the opening / closing mode "C", the right segment display "total jackpot count remaining digit", and the liquid crystal display "total jackpot count last digit" , The left-segment display unit "normally all digits of the number of big hits" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "5", the jackpot round "13R to 15R", the opening / closing mode "A", the right segment display unit "probability change jackpot count full digit", and the liquid crystal display section "big hit count (total, probability variation, normal)" "All digits" and the left-segment display unit "normal jackpot count all digits" are defined respectively.

For the above-mentioned data for setting the jackpot operation effect, the data display device 400 executes an operation effect of changing the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in five stages according to the jackpot round in the jackpot gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1. Is stipulated. The jackpot round can be determined based on the jackpot signal and the prize ball signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. For example, it is assumed that the big prize opening is opened 10 times per round of the big hit game state, and 15 game balls are won by winning for each opening of the big winning opening. In this case, the total number of prize balls per round is 150, so if the game machine 1 outputs a signal of 1 pulse for every 10 balls, the prize will be awarded while the jackpot signal is being received. When the ball signal is received 10 times, it can be determined that one round is completed.

FIG. 56 (3) is a diagram showing an example of data for setting the countdown operation effect, and is a diagram showing an opening / closing order, a remaining count number, an opening / closing mode, and each display unit (right segment display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left segment display). Part) is defined in association with the display mode. The remaining count number is the remaining time (for example, seconds) until a specific event occurs.

This will be described in detail.
The opening / closing order is defined as the fifth order from "1" to "5".
In the opening / closing order "1", the remaining count number "999-800", the opening / closing mode "A", the right segment display unit "count count full digit", and the liquid crystal display unit "count count full digit" are left segment. The display unit "all digits of the count number" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "2", the remaining count number "799-600", the opening / closing mode "B", the right segment display unit "total number of count digits", and the liquid crystal display unit "-(none)" are the left segment. The display unit "all digits of the count number" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "3", the remaining count number "599-400", the opening / closing mode "C", the right segment display unit "count remaining digit", and the liquid crystal display unit "last two digits of the count number" are on the left. The seg display unit "all digits of the count number" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "4", the remaining count number "399-200", the opening / closing mode "D", the right segment display unit "total number of count digits", and the liquid crystal display unit "-(none)" are the left segment. The display unit "all digits of the count number" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "5", the remaining count number "199 to 0", the opening / closing mode "A", the right segment display unit "count count full digit", and the liquid crystal display unit "count count full digit" are left segment. The display unit "all digits of the count number" is defined respectively.

The above countdown operation effect setting data stipulates that the data display device 400 executes an operation effect that changes the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in five stages according to the number of remaining counts until the event occurs. .. The remaining count number can be determined based on the time counting time output from the clock unit 470 included in the data display device 400.

FIG. 56 (4) is a diagram showing an example of data for setting the running operation effect, and is a reference / propagation, a propagation offset from the reference time, a code (own unit number-reference unit number), and | own unit number. -The reference table number | and the opening / closing mode are defined in association with each other.

Reference / propagation is a type of reference / propagation of the data display device 400. The type "reference" is a data display device 400 corresponding to the gaming machine 1 (the gaming machine 1 in which a big hit has occurred), which is an opportunity to execute the running motion effect, and the type "propagation" is a reference data display device. It is a data display device 400 that propagates from 400 and executes a running operation effect.
The propagation offset from the reference time is set by the time when the data display device 400 of the type "reference" starts executing the running motion effect as the reference time, and the data display device 400 of the type "propagation" starts executing the running motion effect. It's time to.
The code (own unit number-reference unit number) is obtained by subtracting the reference unit number, which is the unit number in which the reference data display device 400 is installed, from the own unit number, which is the unit number in which the own data display device 400 is installed. It is a sign of positive or negative of the value.
| Own unit number-reference unit number | is an absolute value of the value obtained by subtracting the reference unit number from the own unit number.
The opening / closing mode is the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in the data display device 400.

This will be described in detail.
In the reference / propagation "reference", the propagation offset "0 seconds" from the reference time is positive / negative "-(none)", and the own unit number-reference unit number "-(none)" is the open / close transition "(setting). A) ”is defined respectively.

In the reference / propagation "propagation", the propagation offset "| own unit number-reference unit number | x 3 seconds" from the reference time is defined, and "positive" and "negative" are defined for the codes, respectively. In the codes "positive" and "negative", the setting of the opening / closing transition ((setting B) ...) according to the value of | own unit number-reference unit number | is defined.

In the above running operation effect setting data, a time difference (offset) is provided in the data display device 400 of the adjacent unit number based on the data display device 400 of the unit number where the big hit occurred, and the operation effect is sequentially propagated. It is stipulated to let them do it. When a big hit occurs, the hall computer 600 outputs a reference running operation effect signal instructing the execution of the running operation effect to the data display device 400 of the reference unit number, and other than the reference unit number (propagation unit number). By outputting a propagation running operation effect signal including a reference stand number and a reference time to the data display device 400 of the above, a big hit occurs in the data display device 400 other than the reference stand number (propagation stand number). It is possible to grasp the machine number of the game machine 1 and the time when the big hit occurred.

Then, the data display device 400 calculates the propagation offset from the reference time corresponding to the own device, and determines that the propagation offset time has elapsed from the reference time based on the time counting time output from the clock unit 470. In the case, the execution of the running motion effect is started. In addition, in the settings shown in parentheses (setting A, setting B, ...), depending on what kind of opening / closing transition the running operation effect is propagated, the data display device 400 of each unit number is used. Any opening / closing mode can be set.

FIG. 56 (5) is a diagram showing an example of data for simultaneous operation effect setting, and is a diagram showing an opening / closing order, an opening / closing offset, an opening / closing mode, and each display unit (right segment display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left segment display unit). ) Is associated with the display mode. The opening / closing offset is the time (for example, seconds) until the door portion 403 is opened / closed in the opening / closing mode of the next opening / closing order.

This will be described in detail.
The opening / closing order is defined as the fifth order from "1" to "5".
In the opening / closing order "1", the opening / closing offset "0 seconds", the opening / closing mode "A", the right seg display unit "-(none)", the liquid crystal display unit "(setting a)", and the left seg display unit "-(None)" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "2", the opening / closing offset "10 seconds", the opening / closing mode "B", the right seg display unit "(setting b)", and the liquid crystal display unit "-(none)" are the left seg display units. "(Setting c)" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "3", the opening / closing offset "20 seconds", the opening / closing mode "C", the right seg display unit "(setting d)", and the liquid crystal display unit "(setting e)" are the left seg display units. "(Setting f)" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "4", the opening / closing offset "30 seconds", the opening / closing mode "D", the right seg display unit "(setting g)", and the liquid crystal display unit "(setting h)" are the left seg display units. "(Setting i)" is defined respectively.

In the opening / closing order "5", the opening / closing offset "40 seconds", the opening / closing mode "A", the right seg display unit "-(none)", the liquid crystal display unit "(setting j)", and the left seg display unit "-(None)" is defined respectively.

The above-mentioned data for setting the simultaneous operation effect stipulates that the data display device 400 executes an operation effect that changes the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in five stages according to the execution condition of the simultaneous operation effect. The open / close offset can be determined based on the time measured output from the clock unit 470 included in the data display device 400. In the settings shown in parentheses (setting a, setting b, ...), any display mode can be set according to the type of simultaneous operation effect to be executed.

In the operation effect defined in the above-mentioned various setting data, in addition to opening and closing the door portion 403 of the data display device 400 to display the information corresponding to the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440, the sound output unit 450 It can be set to output sound or sound effect from. For example, in the ball holding motion effect and the jackpot motion effect, the larger the number of consecutive villas and the jackpot round, the larger the sound effect is output, and in the countdown motion effect, the smaller the remaining count number, the more the specific event. It suffices to make settings such as outputting a sound that notifies that the time until the occurrence is approaching.

By making the above settings related to the operation effect for each model of the corresponding gaming machine or for each gaming island, the operation with a sense of unity and unity among the data display devices 400 corresponding to the same model and the gaming island of the same gaming island. It is possible to realize the production, and it is possible to produce the effect of excitement by the production. This effect is particularly remarkable in the above-mentioned running motion effect and simultaneous motion effect.

Further, by making it possible for the store to set whether or not to execute the motion effect, the data display device 400 can execute the motion effect according to the model and characteristics of the gaming machine. For example, the type of operation effect to be executed by the corresponding data display device 400 may be different between the normal probabilistic machine and the ST machine, or the corresponding data display device may be used for the max type, middle type, and Amadeji type gaming machines. It is possible to make settings such as different types of motion effects to be executed by the 400. Further, for the data display device 400 corresponding to the gaming machine of the model in which the simultaneous effect is executed, in order to prevent the effects from competing with each other, settings such as not to execute the running motion effect or the simultaneous motion effect are made. be able to.
The same applies when the gaming machine is a slot machine.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned various motion effect setting data are merely some examples of the setting data related to the motion effect, and in addition to these motion effect setting data, various motion effect setting data are defined. It is possible to keep it. For example, in addition to the above, the jackpot symbol (333, 777, etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 of the data display device 400 corresponding to the gaming machine 1 in which the jackpot has occurred, and the operation effect is executed. It is also possible to define the operation effect setting data for making the operation effect.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the irradiation effect setting table 6873.
On the irradiation effect setting table 6873, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 480 of the data display device 400 provided corresponding to the game machine 1 is displayed in association with the game machine ID which is the ID of the game machine 1 and its model name. The light emission mode setting data for setting and the motor drive setting data for setting the drive mode of the motor of the light emitting unit 480 of the data display device 400 are stored.

In the data for setting the light emission mode, the "mode" of the irradiation effect instructed via the hall computer 600 or the like, the "big hit type" which is the big hit type of the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the gaming machine 1 are in a high probability state. "Probability change" indicating whether or not the game machine 1 is in the (probability fluctuation state), "high base" indicating whether or not the game machine 1 is in the high base state, and whether or not the game machine 1 is in the latent probability change state. The "latent" shown, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 480 included in the data display device 400, and the light emitting flag are stored in association with each other.

The motor drive setting data includes a "mode" instructed via the hall computer 600 and the like, and a "big hit consecutive villa number" indicating the number of consecutive big hits (number of consecutive villas) in the high probability state of the gaming machine 1. The drive mode of the motor included in the light emitting unit 480 included in the data display device 400 and the drive flag are stored in association with each other.

Here, the number of jackpot consecutive villas can be determined based on the number of times the jackpot signal is received by the data display device 400 in a state where the time saving medium signal and the probability changing signal are output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. ..

Although it is different from the present embodiment, the signal output from the gaming machine 1 includes a signal during the consecutive villas indicating that the player is in the big hit consecutive villas, and the big hit occurs while receiving the signal during the consecutive villas. The number of big hit consecutive villas may be determined based on the number of occurrences.

The data for setting the light emission mode will be specifically described.
The "mode" includes a "normal mode" indicating that it is a normal time, a "directing mode" for the purpose of irradiation effect, a "crime prevention mode" for the purpose of crime prevention, and a "crime prevention mode" for the purpose of equipment maintenance. "Maintenance mode" is included, and the data display device 400 is configured to be able to change these modes according to the mode instruction signal output from the hall computer 600 and the mode instruction signal transmitted from the setting remote controller 700. There is.

The "big hit type" includes "-(none)" indicating that the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in the normal state, and "-(none)" indicating that the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a non-advantageous state. "Non-big hit", "probability" indicating that the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is a sudden jackpot (also referred to as "2R probability variable jackpot"), and the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 are the opening of the big winning opening. "5R" indicates that the number of round games executed, which is a cycle, is 5 times, and the game state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is 15 times, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening. "15R" indicating that it is a big hit is included.

Here, the jackpot type can be determined by the data display device 400 based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. In this case, the corresponding gaming machine 1 is configured to include a signal capable of specifying a jackpot type such as a sudden jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot), a 5R jackpot, or a 15R jackpot in the gaming machine signal and output these games to the outside. The data display device 400 may determine the jackpot type based on the machine signal.

Specifically, the data display device 400 determines that the jackpot type is "-" (that is, the normal state) if none of the jackpot signal, the probability changing signal, and the time saving medium signal is input from the corresponding gaming machine 1. If the jackpot signal is not input and at least one of the probability changing signal and the time saving medium signal is input, it can be determined that the jackpot type is "non-hit". Further, when a jackpot signal indicating a sudden jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot) is input, it can be determined as a jackpot type "sudden probability", and when a jackpot signal indicating a 5R jackpot is input, the jackpot type "5R". When a jackpot signal indicating a 15R jackpot is input, it can be determined that the jackpot type is "15R".

The "probability change" is a flag indicating whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in the probability fluctuation state. “○” indicates a probability fluctuation state, and “×” indicates a non-probability fluctuation state. In the "probability change" of the light emission mode setting data, the sudden probability and the latent probability are "x" indicating a non-probability fluctuation state. The data display device 400 can determine "probability change" when a probabilistic change signal and a time saving signal are input from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

The "high base" is a flag indicating whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in the high base state. “○” indicates a high base state, and “×” indicates a low base state. The data display device 400 can determine "high base" when the time saving medium signal is input from the corresponding gaming machine 1 but the probability changing medium signal is not input.

“Hidden” indicates whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in the latent probability changing state. “○” indicates a latent probability change state, and “×” indicates a non-latent probability change state. The latent probability change state does not clearly notify the player that it is a high probability state even if the probability change is won, and in the high probability state, it is also supported by an electric accessory such as a second start winning opening (electric chew). It is a probability change that is different from a sudden change in that it is a probability change that is not performed. In the "latent" of the light emission mode setting data of the present embodiment, "○" is set only in the case of the latent probability change state. The data display device 400 can determine "latent" when the probability changing signal is input from the corresponding gaming machine 1 but the time saving signal is not input.

The "first display area" includes the first spot LED 480a, the second spot LED 480b, and the third spot LED 480c, and the light emitting modes of these spot LEDs are set respectively. There are "lighting (large)", "lighting (small)", and "lighting out" in the light emitting mode, and the above-mentioned "mode", "big hit type", "probability change", "high base", and "latent". It is set in association with and.

Lighting indicates that the LED is in the ON state, and turning off indicates that the LED is in the OFF state. Lighting (large) indicates, for example, a light amount of about 1000 lumens (lm), and lighting (small) indicates a light amount of, for example, about 300 lumens (lm). That is, in the case of lighting (large), the emitted light is brighter than that of lighting (small). The amount of light in this case can be replaced with, for example, luminous intensity (unit: candela), illuminance (unit: lux), brightness (unit: candela per square meter), power consumption (unit: watt), and the like.

The "second display area" includes the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e, and the light emitting modes of these spot LEDs are set respectively. Similar to the "first display area", the light emitting mode includes "lighting (large)", "lighting (small)", and "off", and the above-mentioned "mode", "big hit type", and "probability change". , "High base", and "latent".

The "light emitting flag" is associated with the light emitting modes of the first to third spot LEDs 480a to 480c in the above-mentioned "first display area" and the first and second appeal LEDs 480d and 480e in the "second display area". And the flag is set. Values of "1" to "11" are set in the light emission flag of the light emission mode setting data of the present embodiment.

An example of associating the light emission flag of the light emission mode setting data will be described. However, the correspondence of the light emission flags described below is only an example, and it is needless to say that the settings can be changed as appropriate.

(1) When the normal state mode is "normal mode", the jackpot type is "-(none)", the probability variation is "x", the high base is "x", and the latency is "x", the first spot LED 480a is It turns on (small), the other spot LEDs and each appeal LED turn off, and "1" is set as the light emission flag. As a result, the player can play the game without any hassle.

(2) When the probability change state mode is "effect mode", the jackpot type is "non-hit", the probability change is "○", the high base is "x", and the latency is "x", the first spot LED 480a and the second The spot LED 480b is turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d is turned on (small), the second appeal LED 480e is turned off, and "2" is set as the light emitting flag. That is, the player can play the game without being bothered, but the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), which results in a different effect from the normal state. The player can have a sense of superiority. Further, by turning on (small) the first appeal light, it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that the state is different from the normal state. It is possible to draw attention to the player who plays.

(3) If the probabilistic state and high base state mode is "directing mode", the jackpot type is "non-hit", the probable change is "○", the high base is "○", and the latency is "x", the first spot The LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (small), and "3" is set as the light emission flag. That is, the player can play the game without being bothered, but the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), which results in a different effect from the normal state. You can have a sense of superiority. Furthermore, by turning on (small) the first appeal light and the second appeal light, it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that the state is different from the normal state. It is possible to draw attention to the player who plays with the gaming machine 1.

(4) When the high base state mode is "directing mode", the jackpot type is "non-hit", the probability variation is "x", the high base is "○", and the latency is "x", the first spot LED 480a and the first The two-spot LED 480b is turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned off, and "4" is set as the light emission flag. That is, the player can play the game without being bothered, but the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), which results in a different effect from the normal state. You can have a sense of superiority.

In this embodiment, the appeal LED is not turned on only in the high base state. As a result, the player who is playing near the corresponding gaming machine 1 can play the game without worrying about the gaming machine 1.

(5) When the high base state and latent probability change state mode is "directing mode", the jackpot type is "non-hit", the probability change is "x", the high base is "○", and the latency is "○", the first The spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (small), and "3" is set as the light emission flag. That is, the player can play the game without being bothered, but the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), which results in a different effect from the normal state. You can have a sense of superiority. Further, since the first appeal LED 480d and the first appeal LED are lit (small), the light emitting mode is the same as the "probability variation state and high base state". That is, the player playing the game with the corresponding gaming machine 1 can grasp that the gaming state is in the high base state, but it is possible to grasp because the player is not clearly notified of the latent probability change state. Can not. However, the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 can know that the gaming machine 1 is in a latent probability changing state due to the presence of the appeal light.

(6) When the latent probability change state mode is "directing mode", the jackpot type is "non-hit", the probability change is "x", the high base is "x", and the latency is "○", the first spot LED 480a lights up. (Small), and the second spot LED 480b and the third spot LED 480c are turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (small), and "5" is set as the light emission flag. That is, the player can play the game without any hassle. Further, by turning on (small) the first appeal light and the second appeal light, it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that the state is different from the normal state. That is, the player playing the game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 is playing the game in the same manner as in the "normal state", whereas the surrounding players and the like are in the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1. It is possible to understand that it is different from the normal state.

(7) When the sudden jackpot mode is "directing mode" and the jackpot type is "sudden probability", the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (large), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. , The first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (small), and "6" is set as a light emission flag. That is, since the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), the player can play the game while having an uplifting feeling. Further, by turning on (small) the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e, it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that the state is different from the normal state. Since the players and the like around the corresponding gaming machine 1 can grasp that the state is different from the normal state, they can pay attention to the gaming machine 1.

(8) 5R jackpot (non-probability change)
When the mode is "effect mode", the jackpot type is "5R", and the probability variation is "x", the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (large), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (small), and "6" is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight and the second spotlight are lit (large), the player can play the game with a feeling of exhilaration. Further, by turning on (small) the first appeal light and the second appeal light, it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that the state is different from the normal state. Since the players and the like around the corresponding gaming machine 1 can grasp that the state is different from the normal state, they can pay attention to the gaming machine 1.

(9) 5R jackpot (probability change)
When the mode is "directing mode", the jackpot type is "5R", and the probability variation is "○", the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), and the third spot LED 480c is lit (small). Will be. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (small), and "7" is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight and the second spotlight are lit (large), the player can play the game with a feeling of exhilaration. Further, since the third spotlight is turned on (small), it is possible to have a feeling of exhilaration more than "5R big hit (non-probability change)". Further, by turning on (small) the first appeal light and the second appeal light, it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that the state is different from the normal state. Since the players and the like around the gaming machine 1 can grasp that the state is different from the normal state, they can pay attention to the gaming machine.

(10) 15R jackpot (non-probability change)
When the mode is "directing mode", the jackpot type is "15R", and the probability variation is "x", the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), and the third spot LED is lit (large). It becomes. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (small), and "8" is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight and the second spotlight are lit (large), the player can play the game with a feeling of exhilaration. Further, since the third spotlight is turned on (large), it is possible to have an uplifting feeling more than the "5R big hit". Further, by turning on (small) the first appeal light and the second appeal light, it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that the state is different from the normal state. Since the players and the like around the gaming machine 1 can grasp that the state is different from the normal state, they can pay attention to the gaming machine 1.

(11) 15R jackpot (probability change)
When the mode is "directing mode", the jackpot type is "15R", and the probability variation is "○", the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), and the third spot LED is lit (large). It becomes. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are lit (large), and "9" is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight, the second spotlight, and the third spotlight are turned on (large), the player can play the game with a feeling of exhilaration. Further, when the first appeal light and the second appeal light are turned on (large), the gaming state is "15R jackpot (probability change)" for the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1. Will be appealing. Since the players and the like around the gaming machine 1 can grasp that the state is different from the normal state, they can pay attention to the gaming machine.

(12) Security mode When the mode is "security mode", the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large) regardless of the type of game state (big hit type, probability variation, high base, latency). The other LEDs are turned off, and "10" is set as the light emission flag. The directions of the first spotlight and the second spotlight will be described in "Motor drive setting data", but the directions of the first spotlight and the second spotlight are different from the effect mode in the corresponding gaming machine 1. The face of the player playing the game is changed to a direction that is easy to grasp. As will be described later, this is for the purpose of crime prevention.

(13) Maintenance mode When the mode is "maintenance mode", each LED is turned off and "11" is set as a light emission flag. That is, in the maintenance mode, for example, since it is a mode set at the time of inspection of the corresponding gaming machine 1, each LED is turned off in consideration of the safety of the workplace.

Next, the data for motor drive setting will be specifically described.
The "mode" includes a "directing mode", a "crime prevention mode", and a "maintenance mode", as in the case of the light emission mode setting data.

"Number of big hit consecutive villas" includes "other than 15R big hit" indicating other than 15R big hit, "first time" indicating the first state of 15R big hit, and "2" indicating the number of consecutive villas of 15R big hit being the second or more. After the first time ".

The "first display area" includes the first spot LED 480a, the second spot LED 480b, and the third spot LED 480c, and the mode of motor drive of the first to third spot LEDs is set respectively. The driving modes of the motor include, for example, "-70 deg (downward)", "-65 deg (downward)", "-50 deg (downward)", "-45 deg (downward)", "rotation", and "rotation". (Setting each part) ”, which is set in association with the above-mentioned“ mode ”and“ number of big hit consecutive villas ”.

The "second display area" includes the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e, and the motor driving modes of the first and second spot LEDs are set respectively. Motor drive modes include, for example, "15 deg (upward)", "0 deg", and "rotation", and like the first display area, the above-mentioned "mode" and "number of jackpot consecutive villas". It is set in association with and.

An example of associating the drive flags of the motor drive setting data will be described. However, the association of the drive flags described below is only an example, and it is needless to say that the settings can be changed as appropriate.

(1) Drive flag "1"
When the mode is "effect mode" and the number of jackpots is "other than 15R jackpot", the drive mode of the first spot LED motor is "-70 deg (downward)" and the drive mode of the second spot LED motor is "-70 deg (downward)". It becomes "-65 deg (downward)", and the drive mode of the third spot LED motor becomes "(each part setting)". Further, the drive mode of the first appeal LED motor is "+15 deg (upward)", the drive mode of the second appeal LED motor is "-15 deg (downward)", and "1" is set as the drive flag. That is, the first spotlight is irradiated downward to 70 deg, and the second spotlight is irradiated downward to 65 deg, so that the spotlight is generally directed toward the body part of the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine 1. NS. Further, the first appeal light is irradiated toward the upward 15 deg, and the second appeal ride is irradiated toward the downward 15 deg, so that the appeal light is slightly obliquely upward and downward of the data display device 400. Be irradiated.

(2) Drive flag "2"
When the mode is "effect mode" and the number of big hits is "first time", the drive mode of the first spot LED motor is "-70 deg (downward)" and the drive mode of the second spot LED motor is "-". "65 deg (downward)", and the drive mode of the third spot LED motor is "rotation". Further, the drive mode of the first appeal LED motor is "+15 deg (upward)", the drive mode of the second appeal LED motor is "-15 deg (downward)", and "2" is set as the drive flag. That is, the first spotlight is irradiated downward 70 deg, the second spotlight is irradiated downward 65 deg, and the third spotlight is irradiated while rotating. Others are the same as the drive flag “1”.

(3) Drive flag "3"
When the mode is "effect mode" and the number of big hits is "second and subsequent times", the drive mode of the first spot LED motor is "-70 deg (downward)" and the drive mode of the second spot LED motor is "-70 deg (downward)". It becomes "-65 deg (downward)", and the drive mode of the third spot LED motor becomes "rotation". Further, the drive mode of the first appeal LED motor is "rotation", the drive mode of the second appeal LED motor is "rotation", and "3" is set as the drive flag. That is, the first spotlight is irradiated downward 70 deg, the second spotlight is irradiated downward 65 deg, and the third spotlight is irradiated while rotating. Further, the first appeal light and the second appeal light are each irradiated while rotating.

(4) Drive flag "4"
When the mode is "security mode", the drive mode of the first spot LED motor is "-50 deg (downward)", the drive mode of the second spot LED motor is "-45 deg (downward)", and the third spot. The drive mode of the LED motor is "(setting of each part)". Further, the drive mode of the first appeal LED motor is "+15 deg (upward)", the drive mode of the second appeal LED motor is "-15 deg (downward)", and "4" is set as the drive flag. That is, the first spotlight is irradiated downward 50 deg, and the second spotlight is irradiated downward 45 deg, so that the spotlight is generally directed toward the face portion of the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine 1. NS. The appeal light is the same as the drive flag "1".

(5) Drive flag "5"
When the mode is "maintenance mode", the drive mode of each motor is "(setting of each part)". This is because it is necessary to inspect the light emitting unit 480 for maintenance, so that the direction of each LED can be set individually on the store side.

The contents of the above irradiation mode setting data are freely defined for each device of the data display device 400, for each model of the corresponding gaming machine 1, and for each gaming island on which the gaming machine 1 is installed. be able to.

Regarding the first spot LED 480a to the third spot LED 480c constituting the first display area LED unit 481, the light emitting mode (LED) in the light emitting mode setting data so that at least a part of the irradiation area by these spot LEDs overlaps. It is desirable to determine the light emission pattern, etc.) and the drive mode (angle for driving the LED, etc.) in the motor drive setting data. By doing so, it is possible to simultaneously irradiate the player with the plurality of spot LEDs, so that it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, the content of the light emission mode setting data and the content of the motor drive setting data shown in the above irradiation mode setting data are merely examples, and these contents can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the light emitting mode in the light emitting mode setting data or in the motor drive setting data, depending on the acquisition status of the player's game value such as the number of balls held or the number of stored balls owned by the player playing with the corresponding gaming machine 1. The driving mode may be determined. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a more special feeling.

58 and 59 are explanatory views of the principle of irradiation effect in this embodiment.
In the following description, the front-back direction with respect to the game machine 1 and the data display device 400 is the "X-axis", the left-right direction with respect to the game machine 1 and the data display device 400 is the "Y-axis", the game machine 1 and the data. The vertical direction with respect to the display device 400 will be described as the "Z axis".

58 (1) and (2) are left side views of the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400.
The first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b constituting the first display area LED unit 481 show an image (irradiation image) of the irradiation direction as a reference, respectively, with a dotted line. For example, the angle around the Y axis is defined as the first light distribution angle “α”, and the downward direction toward the paper surface is defined as a negative angle (−deg). Further, the reference axis of the irradiation direction by the upper and lower first spot LEDs 480a and the second spot LED 480b is shown as the first optical axis.

At this time, FIG. 58 (1) shows a state in which the spot LED motor is controlled so that the first light distribution angle is “α = α1”. In this state, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot are shown. The LED 480b irradiates the body portion of the player playing with the gaming machine 1 with light. In this state, in the motor drive setting data shown in FIG. 57, the mode corresponds to "effect mode", the first spot LED motor corresponds to "-70 deg", and the second spot LED motor corresponds to "-65 deg". ..

Further, FIG. 58 (2) shows a state in which the spot LED motor is controlled so that the first light distribution angle is “α = α2”. In this state, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are shown. Light is radiated toward the face of the player playing the game with the game machine 1. In this state, in the motor drive setting data shown in FIG. 57, the mode corresponds to "security mode", the first spot LED motor corresponds to "-50 deg", and the second spot LED motor corresponds to "-45 deg". ..

By doing so, when there is a possibility that the player commits an illegal act such as a goto act or a theft act, the player's face is unclear due to the low illuminance of the light emitting unit 480 or the like. However, since the security camera 950 installed on the ceiling of the store makes it possible to clearly show the player's face, the store plays the role of lighting and commits illegal acts such as goto and theft. It will be easier to identify on the side. Further, in the crime prevention mode, since the light is applied to the player's face, it is assumed that the player has a feeling of strangeness different from the normal time, and the effect of deterring illegal acts can be expected.

In the crime prevention mode, in order to clearly show the scene where the illegal act is performed, the light may be irradiated in a direction that makes it easy to grasp the player's hand. Further, the plurality of spot LEDs may be used to irradiate the player's face and hand in a direction that makes it easy to grasp each of them.

FIG. 59 (1) is a top view of the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400.
For example, the angle around the Z axis is defined as the second light distribution angle "β". Further, the reference axis of the irradiation direction by the left and right third spot LEDs 480c is shown as the second light distribution axis.

At this time, in FIG. 59 (1), the second light distribution angle corresponding to the third spot LED 480c provided on the left side of the first display area facing the front is “β = β1”, and the first display facing the front. It shows a state in which the spot LED motor is controlled so that the second light distribution angle corresponding to the third spot LED 480c provided on the right side of the region is “β = β2”. When the third spot LED 480c is rotated downward around the Y axis in this state, light is emitted toward the player. In this state, in the motor drive setting data shown in FIG. 57, for example, the mode corresponds to the “effect mode”, and the third spot LED motor corresponds to “(setting of each part)” or “rotation”.

FIG. 59 (2) is a front view of the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400.
The image (irradiation image) of the irradiation direction by the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480d constituting the second display area LED unit 482 is shown by a dotted line. For example, the angle around the X-axis is defined as the third light distribution angle "γ", and the upward direction toward the paper surface is defined as a positive angle (+ deg). Further, the reference axis of the irradiation direction by the upper and lower first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e is shown as the third light distribution axis.

At this time, in FIG. 59 (2), the third light distribution angle corresponding to the appeal LED provided in the second display area on the right side when facing the front is “γ = γ1”, and the second display area on the left side when facing the front. It shows a state in which the appeal LED motor is controlled so that the third light distribution angle corresponding to the appeal LED provided in the above is “γ = γ2”. In this state, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are shown. Light is emitted in the diagonally upward direction and the diagonally downward direction. In this state, in the motor drive setting data shown in FIG. 57, for example, the mode corresponds to "effect mode", the first appeal LED motor corresponds to "+15 deg", and the second appeal LED motor corresponds to "-15 deg". be.

Although a brief description is given here, the spot LED and the appeal LED are configured to be able to irradiate light in the corresponding directions by rotation around their respective axes.

Further, in the above operation effect, a light emission effect (irradiation effect) may be executed by causing the spot LED or the appeal LED to emit light. That is, for each of the various operation effects described above, the operation effect setting data that defines the light emission mode of the spot LED and the appeal LED and the drive mode of the motor is defined in accordance with the irradiation effect setting data, and this operation is performed. Based on the effect setting data, the data display device 400 may also execute the light emission effect (irradiation effect) in the operation effect. In this case, the light emitting mode of the LED and the driving mode of the motor can be appropriately set on the store side according to the type of operation effect.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the display device setting data 691 transmitted by the hall computer 600 to the data display device 400 in the present embodiment.
In addition to the above-mentioned data, the display device setting data 691 includes the effect setting data 6919. The effect setting data 6919 is generated based on various effect setting tables (open / close setting table 6871, operation effect setting table 6872, irradiation effect setting table 6873) included in the effect setting table 687. Data. Specifically, the data determined based on the device correspondence table 686 of the data of the opening / closing mode defined in the opening / closing setting table 6871 and the operation effect setting data defined in the operation effect setting table 6782. The data display device ID determined based on the device correspondence relationship table 686 of the data defined for the game machine ID corresponding to the display device ID and the irradiation effect setting data defined in the irradiation effect setting table 687 The data including the data defined for the corresponding game machine ID is referred to as the effect setting data 6919.

Further, in order to instruct the data display device 400 from the hall computer 600 to start executing the irradiation effect, the mode instruction signal for instructing the above-mentioned irradiation effect mode (effect mode, crime prevention mode, maintenance mode). Irradiation effect start instruction signal, irradiation effect end instruction signal for instructing the end of irradiation effect execution, irradiation effect stop instruction signal for instructing stop of irradiation effect execution, and instruction to cancel the change of irradiation mode. A signal including a reset signal for the purpose is output as a management device signal.

[3-5. process]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of a flow of operation effect processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 according to the operation effect program 491c stored in the storage unit 490 in the present embodiment.

First, the processing unit 410 is transmitted from the setting remote controller 700 such as a gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1, a unit signal output from the corresponding unit, a management device signal output from the hall computer 600, and the like. The external signal including the signal and the like is determined (K1).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the stop setting of the operation effect is made (K3), and if it is determined that the stop setting is made (K3; Yes), the processing is transferred to K31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation effect stop setting has not been made (K3; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect execution condition is satisfied (K5). Specifically, one of the execution conditions (execution conditions of the operation effect setting data in FIG. 55) defined in the operation effect setting data stored in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691. It is determined whether or not the above execution conditions are satisfied.

If it is determined that the operation effect execution condition is not satisfied (K5; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to K21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied (K5; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines the type of operation effect corresponding to the satisfied execution condition (K7).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not there is a conflict between the operation effects to be executed (K9). Specifically, in K7, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of types of operation effects corresponding to the satisfied execution conditions (that is, whether or not the execution conditions corresponding to the plurality of types of operation effects are simultaneously satisfied). do.

If it is determined that there is no conflict (K9; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to K13. If it is determined that there is a conflict (K9; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines the type of operation effect to be executed (K11). Specifically, based on the priority stored in the operation effect setting data included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691, the priority is the highest among the types of conflicting operation effects. The type of motion effect is determined as the type of motion effect to be executed.

After that, the processing unit 410 determines the opening / closing mode (effect mode) of the door unit 403 by referring to the operation effect setting data included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691 (L13). Then, the processing unit 410 starts executing the operation effect (K15).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect is being executed (K17), and if it is determined that the operation effect is not being executed (K17; No), the processing is transferred to K31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution is in progress (K17; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the condition for changing the opening / closing mode of the door unit 403 is satisfied (K19). Specifically, in the setting data corresponding to the running operation effect among the operation effect setting data included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691, the opening / closing order next to the current opening / closing order is specified. It is determined whether or not the condition corresponding to is satisfied. If it is determined that this is not the case (K19; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to K23.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening / closing mode change condition is satisfied (K19; Yes), the processing unit 410 changes the opening / closing mode of the door unit 403 (K21). After that, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect end condition is satisfied (K23). Specifically, in the setting data corresponding to the running operation effect among the operation effect setting data included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691, the condition corresponding to the last opening / closing order is satisfied. Determine if it holds. If it is determined that the condition is not established (K23; No), the process is transferred to K27.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation effect end condition is satisfied (K23; Yes), the processing unit 410 ends the operation effect being executed (K25). After that, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect stop condition is satisfied (K27). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation of pressing the operation stop button 422 is detected, or whether or not a stop instruction signal for stopping the operation effect is received from the hall computer 600 or the setting remote controller 700. If it is determined that this is not the case (K27; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to K31.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation effect stop condition is satisfied (K27; Yes), the processing unit 410 stops the operation effect being executed (K29). Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the processing (K31), and if it is determined to continue the processing (K31; No), returns the processing to K1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing is finished (K31; Yes), the processing unit 410 ends the operation effect processing.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the irradiation effect processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 according to the irradiation effect program 491c stored in the storage unit 490. This process is a process executed as a subroutine process in the data display device process executed by the processing unit 410 according to the data display device processing program 491 stored in the storage unit 490.

The processes other than the irradiation effect process (payout rate related process, special effect process, display process, etc.) can be realized as substantially the same process as the process executed by the data display device 1200 described in the second embodiment. Therefore, the description is omitted.

First, the processing unit 410 is transmitted from the setting remote controller 700 such as a gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1, a unit signal output from the corresponding unit, a management device signal output from the hall computer 600, and the like. The external signal including the signal and the like is determined (L1).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect stop setting is made (L3), and if it is determined that the irradiation effect is stopped (L3; Yes), the processing is transferred to L31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect stop setting has not been made (L3; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect start condition is satisfied (L5).

Here, the irradiation effect start condition can be determined, for example, as one of the following conditions is satisfied.
(A-1) A signal (big hit signal (sudden probability, 5R, 15R, etc.), probability changing signal, time saving medium signal, etc.) that can specify an advantageous state is newly received from the corresponding gaming machine 1.
(A-2) The irradiation effect start instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 600.
(A-3) The irradiation effect start instruction signal has been received from the setting remote controller 700.
(A-4) A security signal has been received from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

The condition (A-1) is that when the corresponding gaming machine 1 starts control to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state (sudden probability, 5R, 15R, etc.), probability change state, high base state, latent probability change state, etc.). , Means to start the execution of the irradiation effect.
The condition (A-2) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is started when the manager of the store or the like gives an instruction to execute the irradiation effect via the hall computer 600.
The condition (A-3) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is started when the store clerk or the like gives an instruction to execute the irradiation effect via the setting remote controller 700.
The condition of (A-4) is that when it is detected that some abnormality has occurred in the corresponding gaming machine 1, the execution of the irradiation effect is started for the purpose of leaving it to the player, the store clerk, or the like. Means to do.

If it is determined that the irradiation effect start condition is not satisfied (L5; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to L13. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect start condition is satisfied (L5; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines the light emission setting data and the motor included in the irradiation effect setting data 6919 based on the determination result of the external signal of L1. The light emission flag and the drive flag are determined with reference to the drive setting data (L7). Then, the processing unit 410 sets the determined light emission flag and drive flag (L9).

Next, the processing unit 410 issues a control command to the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b based on the set contents of L9 (L11). As a result, the first display area LED unit 481 and the second display area LED unit 482 emit light, and the execution of the irradiation effect is started.

After that, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect is being executed (L13), and if it is determined that the irradiation effect is not being executed (L13; No), the processing is transferred to L31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect is being executed (L13; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect end condition is satisfied (L15).

Here, the irradiation effect end condition can be set as, for example, the following conditions corresponding to each of the above irradiation effect start conditions.
(B-1) The reception of the signal corresponding to (A-1) has been completed.
(B-2) The irradiation effect end instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 600.
(B-3) The irradiation effect end instruction signal has been received from the setting remote controller 700.
(B-4) The security signal is no longer received from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

If it is determined that the irradiation effect end condition is not satisfied (L15; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to L21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect end condition is satisfied (L15; Yes), the processing unit 410 stops the control command to the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b (L17). As a result, the execution of the irradiation effect is completed. Then, the processing unit 410 resets the flags (light emission flag and drive flag) (L19).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation mode change release condition is satisfied (L21).
Here, the irradiation mode change release condition can be defined as, for example, one of the following conditions being satisfied.
(C-1) A reset signal has been received from the hall computer 600.
(C-2) A reset operation for the operation unit 420 has been detected.
(C-3) The reset operation was detected from the setting remote controller 700.
(C-4) The disconnection of the power supply of the own device was detected.

The condition (C-1) means that when the store manager or the like gives an instruction to cancel the change of the irradiation mode via the hall computer 600, the change of the irradiation mode is canceled.
The condition (C-2) means that the change in the irradiation mode is canceled when the store clerk or the like gives an instruction to cancel the change in the irradiation mode via the operation unit 420.
The condition (C-3) means that when the store clerk or the like gives an instruction to cancel the change of the irradiation mode via the setting remote controller 700, the change of the irradiation mode is canceled.
The condition of (C-4) means that the change of the irradiation mode is canceled when the power of the own device is turned off.

If it is determined that the irradiation mode change release condition is not satisfied (L21; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to L25. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation mode change release condition is satisfied (L21; Yes), the processing unit 410 resets the flags (light emission flag and drive flag) (L23). As a result, the irradiation mode in the irradiation effect is initialized.

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect stop condition is satisfied (L25).
Here, the irradiation effect stop condition can be determined, for example, as one of the following conditions is satisfied.
(D-1) The pressing of the light emission stop button 423 was detected.
(D-2) The irradiation effect stop instruction signal is received from the hall computer 600.
(D-3) The irradiation effect stop instruction signal has been received from the setting remote controller 700.

The condition (D-1) means that when the player playing the game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 feels that the irradiation effect is troublesome, the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped in response to the stop operation.
The condition (D-2) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped when the store manager or the like gives an instruction to stop the irradiation effect via the hall computer 600.
The condition (D-3) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped when the store clerk or the like gives an instruction to stop the irradiation effect via the setting remote controller 700.

If it is determined that the irradiation effect stop condition is not satisfied (L25; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to L31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect stop condition is satisfied (L25; Yes), the processing unit 410 stops the control command to the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b (L27). As a result, the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped. Then, the processing unit 410 sets the irradiation effect stop setting (L29).

If the irradiation effect restart condition corresponding to each of the above irradiation effect stop conditions is satisfied after the irradiation effect stop setting is made in L29, the flag (light emission) set when the irradiation effect execution is stopped is satisfied. The execution of the irradiation effect may be restarted based on the flag and the drive flag).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the processing (L31), and if it is determined to continue the processing (L31; No), returns the processing to L1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing is completed (L31; Yes), the processing unit 410 ends the irradiation effect processing.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the personal game history information recording process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 according to the personal game history information recording program 491e stored in the storage unit 490.

First, the processing unit 410 reads out the value of the current recording flag (M1). Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the recording flag is set to "1" (M3). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the recording flag is set to "1" when the information recording start operation is accepted. Therefore, when the information recording start operation is received from the mobile terminal 250 via the non-contact communication unit 464, the processing unit 410 sets the recording flag to "1".

If it is determined that "1" is set in the recording flag (M3; Yes), the processing unit 410 starts reading the personal game history information (M5). Then, the processing unit 410 sets the recording flag to "2" (M7). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the information recording start preparation process is executed while the recording flag is set to "2". Therefore, when the processing unit 410 sets the recording flag to "2", the processing unit 410 starts the execution of the information recording start preparation process.

When "1" is not set in the recording flag (M3; No), or after M7, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not "2" is set in the recording flag (M9). Then, if it is determined that it is set (M9; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the information recording start preparation process being executed is completed (M11), and if it is determined that it is completed. (M9; Yes), after displaying the preparation completion screen on the liquid crystal display unit 430, "3" is set in the recording flag (M13). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the personal game history information is recorded / updated while the recording flag is set to "3".

When "2" is not set in the recording flag (M9; No), or after M13, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not "3" is set in the recording flag (M15). Then, if it is determined that it is not set (M15; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not "4" is set in the recording flag (M17). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the recording flag is set to "4" when the information recording end operation is accepted. Therefore, when the information recording start operation is received from the mobile terminal 250 via the non-contact communication unit 464, the processing unit 410 sets the recording flag to "4".

If it is determined that "4" is set in the recording flag (M17; Yes), the processing unit 410 sets to stop updating the personal game history information (M19). Then, the processing unit 410 sets the recording flag to "5" (M21). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the information recording end preparation process is executed while the recording flag is set to "5". Therefore, when the processing unit 410 sets the recording flag to "5", the processing unit 410 starts the execution of the information recording end preparation process.

When "4" is not set in the recording flag (M17; No), or after M21, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not "5" is set in the recording flag (M23). Then, if it is determined that it is set (M23; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the information recording end preparation process being executed is completed (M27), and if it is determined that it is completed. (M27; Yes), after displaying the preparation completion screen on the liquid crystal display unit 430, "6" is set in the recording flag (M13). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the recording flag is set to "6" when the information recording process is completed.

When "5" is not set in the recording flag (M23; No), or after M27, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not "6" is set in the recording flag (M29). Then, if it is determined that the information is set (M29; Yes), the processing unit 410 controls the personal game history information so as to output identifiable information (M31). Specifically, for example, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is controlled to display a two-dimensional code including access information such as a URL for accessing the server 980 from the mobile terminal 250.

When "6" is not set in the recording flag (M29; No), or after M33, the processing unit 410 ends the personal game history information recording process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in M11 that the information recording start preparation process is not completed (M11; No), when it is determined in M15 that "3" is set in the recording flag (M15; Yes), or M25. When it is determined that the information recording end preparation process is not completed (M25; No), the processing unit 410 executes the updating process (M35). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the personal game history information recording process.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the first updating process, which is an example of the updating process executed by the processing unit 410.
First, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the individual game history information update condition is satisfied (N1). Specifically, the game information is acquired based on the game machine signal output from the corresponding game machine 1, and it is determined whether or not it is necessary to update the personal game history information.

If it is determined that the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (N1; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not "3" is set in the recording flag (N3). Then, if it is determined that it is set (N3; Yes), the personal game history information data 497 of the storage unit 490 is updated with the game information acquired based on the game machine signal output from the corresponding game machine 1 (N3; Yes). N5). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the first updating process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "3" is not set in the recording flag (N3; No), the processing unit 410 displays the preparation screen for notifying the user that the preparation is in progress on the liquid crystal display unit 430. It is controlled to be caused (N7). Specifically, if the recording flag is "2", the information recording start preparation process is being executed, and if the recording flag is "5", the information recording end preparation process is being executed. Then, the processing unit 410 ends the first updating process. If it is determined that the personal game history information update condition is not satisfied (N1; No), the processing unit 410 ends the first updating process.

Here, when the recording flag is not set to "3" even though the first updating process is executed, the information is that the recording flag is "2" in the personal game history information recording process. When the recording start preparation process is not completed (M9; Yes → M11; No in FIG. 63), that is, when the information recording start preparation process is being executed, and when the recording flag is “5” and the information recording end preparation process is completed. This is either the case where the process is not completed (M23; Yes → M25; No in FIG. 63), that is, the case where the information recording end preparation process is being executed. In this case, the fact that the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (N1; Yes) means that the corresponding gaming machine is in the process of executing either the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process. It means that the game was played in 1.

If the game is played on the game machine 1 during the preparation process, the personal game history information cannot be updated properly, and in some cases, information that is not normal due to garbled data is used as personal game history information. There is a possibility that it will be provided to the person. Therefore, in the first updating process, if the individual game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process, an individual is prohibited. Restrict the update of game history information.

Here, limiting the update of the personal game history information means that the personal game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process. It means that the personal game history information is not updated until the processing being executed is completed. That is, when the update is restricted during the execution of the information recording start preparation process, until the information recording start preparation process is completed and the recording flag is set to "3" (M11 in FIG. 63; Yes → M13). ), Do not update the personal game history information. In other words, when the information recording start preparation process is completed and the recording flag is set to "3"(M11; Yes → M13 in FIG. 63), the restriction on updating the personal game history information is released. In this case, since the recording flag is determined to be "3" in the first updating process (N3; Yes), the personal game history information is updated (N5).
The same applies when the update is restricted during the execution of the information recording end preparation process.

Here, depending on the player, a player who makes a trial hit to confirm the state of the gaming machine 1 and then records the personal game history information to shift to a full-scale game, or a player who shifts to a full-scale game or records the personal game history information. It is probable that there is a player who forgets that and starts the game, but notices that he has forgotten and later records the personal game history information to continue the game. Assuming such a situation, the game information before the time when the execution of the information recording start preparation process is started is not included in the recording of the personal game history information, and from the time when the execution of the information recording start preparation process is started. It is desirable to record personal game history information.

Therefore, in updating the personal game history information of N5, it is preferable to update the personal game history information using the game information of the corresponding game machine 1 at the time when the execution of the information recording start preparation process is started as the reference information. Further, when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the information recording start preparation process and the update of the personal game history information is restricted as described above, the corresponding gaming machine 1 at the time when the information recording start preparation process is started is performed. The game information may be used as the reference information, and the personal game history information may be updated after the update restriction is lifted.

Further, even when the update of the personal game history information is restricted, it is considered appropriate for the operation of the store to notify the player and other players of the correct information on the display of the data display device 400. Will be. Therefore, even when the update of the personal game history information is restricted, the processing unit 410 stores and updates the personal game history information for display in a RAM or the like separately from the personal game history information to be recorded. It is preferable to display the stored / updated personal game history information for display on the liquid crystal display unit 430 or the seg display unit 440.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the second updating process, which is another example of the updating process executed by the processing unit 410.
First, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the individual game history information update condition is satisfied (O1), and if it is determined that the condition is satisfied (O1; Yes), "3" is set in the recording flag. It is determined whether or not it is present (O3). Then, if it is determined that it is set (O3; Yes), the personal game history information data 497 of the storage unit 490 is updated with the game information acquired based on the game machine signal output from the corresponding game machine 1 (O3; Yes). O5). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the second updating process.

When it is determined that "3" is not set in the recording flag (O3; No), the processing unit 410 determines the set recording flag (O7), and determines that the recording flag is "2". If so (O7; 2), set the recording flag to "0" (O9). In this case, since the recording flag is changed from "2" to "0", the processing unit 410 ends the information recording start preparation process. Then, the processing unit 410 controls the liquid crystal display unit 430 to display the re-operation screen (start operation) prompting the re-operation of the information recording start (O11), and then ends the second updating process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the set recording flag is "5" (O7; 5), the processing unit 410 sets the recording flag to "3" (O13). In this case, since the recording flag is changed from "5" to "3", the processing unit 410 ends the information recording end preparation process. Then, the processing unit 410 controls the liquid crystal display unit 430 to display the re-operation screen (end operation) prompting the re-operation of the information recording end (O15), and then ends the second updating process. If it is determined that the personal game history information update condition is not satisfied (O1; No), the processing unit 410 ends the second updating process.

Here, when "3" is not set in the recording flag even though the second updating process is executed, the information recording start preparation process is being executed as in the first update process. There is either a case or a case where the information recording end preparation process is being executed. Further, in this case, the fact that the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (N1; Yes) corresponds to the fact that one of the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process is being executed. It means that the game was played on the game machine 1.

As described above, if the game is played on the gaming machine 1 during the execution of the preparation process, it becomes impossible to properly update the personal game history information, and in some cases, the information that is not normal due to garbled data is personal. There is a possibility that it will be provided to the user as game history information. Therefore, in the second updating process, if the personal game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process, it is executed as a prohibition. Limit the processing inside.

Here, limiting the processing being executed means that it is being executed when the personal game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the information recording start preparation processing or the information recording end preparation processing. Forcibly terminates the process of, and accepts the operation corresponding to the process again, which means that the corresponding process is executed again. That is, if the update is restricted during the execution of the information recording start preparation process, the information recording start preparation process is forcibly terminated (O9), and the recording is started according to the display of the re-operation screen (start operation) (O11). When the operation is accepted again, the information recording start preparation process is executed again.
The same applies when the execution of the information recording end preparation process is restricted.

As a processing limitation, the running process may be stopped instead of forcibly terminating the running process as described above. In this case, the stopped processing may be restarted when the re-operation is performed.

Further, here, it was decided to display the re-operation screen for prompting the user to re-accept the operation corresponding to the restricted processing (information recording start operation or information recording end operation) on the liquid crystal display unit 430. Instead of this, the sound output unit 450 may output a sound for prompting the user to accept it again.

Further, if a certain period of time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the corresponding gaming machine 1 no longer outputs the gaming machine signal, and the information recording end operation is not accepted, the player forgets the operation. It is possible that he has gone away. Therefore, in order to be able to deal with such forgetting of the end operation, the processing unit 410 outputs the latest personal game history information stored in association with the member ID and the mobile ID to the hall computer 600. May be executed. In this case, the hall computer 600 transmits the information acquired from the data display device 400 to the server 980, and manages the latest personal game history information in association with the member ID and the mobile ID on the server 980 side. , The user can later acquire the personal game history information from the server 980.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information recording start operation and the information recording end operation are realized by non-contact communication between the mobile terminal 250 and the data display device 400, but the mobile terminal 250 is appropriately used as an IC reader / writer. It is also assumed that the operation cannot be properly accepted due to reasons such as not being held or a communication error occurring. Therefore, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the communication with the mobile terminal 250 and the operation cannot be properly accepted, a notification process for notifying the hall computer 600 that the acceptance of the operation has failed is executed. You may do so.

When receiving a notification that the reception of the information recording start operation has failed, the hall computer 600 is concerned based on the gaming machine signal output from the gaming machine 1 corresponding to the notified data display device 400. The game information of the game machine 1 is stored and updated. Then, when the data display device 400 notifies that the information recording end operation has been accepted, the latest stored game information may be output to the data display device 400 as personal game history information. good.

Further, when receiving a notification that the reception of the information recording end operation has failed, the hall computer 600 requests the data display device 400 to transmit the latest personal game history information, and the latest personal game history information. Is obtained from the data display device 400 in association with the member ID and the mobile ID. Then, the hall computer 600 transmits the information acquired from the data display device 400 to the server 980, and manages the latest personal game history information in association with the member ID and the mobile ID on the server 980 side. The user can later acquire the personal game history information from the server 980.

[3-6. Display screen]
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400, and shows an example of an individual game history screen on which personal game history information is displayed.
On this individual game history screen, as individual game history information on the corresponding gaming machine 1, the total number of big hits, the number of probable variable big hits, the number of normal big hits, the number of starts, the big hit history graph, and the payout graph are displayed. It is displayed.

FIG. 66 (1) is a diagram showing an example of a screen being prepared.
This display screen shows a display example of the preparation screen displayed when the recording flag is set to "2" or "5" in the above personal game history recording process (N7 in FIG. 64). .. In this example, a pop-up containing the message "Preparing .... Please wait ..." and the image of the hourglass is displayed as the displaying screen in the center of the personal game history screen.

FIG. 66 (2) is a diagram showing an example of a preparation completion screen.
This display screen shows a display example of the preparation completion screen displayed when the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process is completed in the personal game history recording process (M13 in FIG. 63 or). M27). In this example, a pop-up containing the message "Ready" is displayed in the center of the personal game history screen.

FIG. 66 (3) is a diagram showing an example of a re-operation screen.
This display screen shows a display example of the re-operation screen displayed in the above-mentioned personal game history recording process (O11 or O15 in FIG. 65). In this example, a pop-up containing the message "Sorry, please try again" is displayed in the center of the personal game history screen.

In the above data display device 400, similarly to the data display device 1200, LEDs (left frame LED and right frame LED) are provided as light emitting means in the left frame and the right frame of the liquid crystal display unit 430 to form the data display device 1200. Similarly, these LEDs may be made to emit light to execute the irradiation effect.

[3-7. Action effect]
In the second gaming system 1000B, a data display device 400 is provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 1).

The data display device 400 can display information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine. The data display device 400 is a processing unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display unit 430 by the liquid crystal display method, the seg display unit 440 by the seg display method different from the liquid crystal display method, and the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440. And prepare. The processing unit is a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern in which the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 perform a linked display, and a liquid crystal seg independent display pattern in which the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 display independently. Therefore, it is possible to execute a control for displaying information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine.
According to this, information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed by the liquid crystal seg linked display pattern and the liquid crystal seg independent display pattern for the two display units of the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 using different display methods. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of producing information on the game.

Further, the data display device 400 can display information about the game of the corresponding game machine 1, can accept the information recording start operation and the information recording end operation, and can receive the information about the game after receiving the information recording start operation. Can be identifiable and stored as personal game history information, personal game history information can be updated according to the establishment of update conditions according to the game, and personal game history is based on the acceptance of the information recording end operation. Information that can identify the information can be output. Then, the processing unit 410 can execute the information recording start preparation process based on the information recording start operation and the information recording end preparation process based on the information recording end operation, and the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process. If the update condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the processes, the update of the personal game history information can be restricted, and either the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process can be restricted. If the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the process, the process being executed can be restricted.
According to these, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game history information.

Further, the processing unit 410 can execute an operation effect by operating the seg display unit 440 configured as a movable unit based on the timekeeping information acquired from the clock unit 470.
According to this, the effect of production can be further improved.

[3-8. Modification example]
[3-8-1. Display of numerical information]
In the data display device 400 described in the above embodiment, the processing unit 410 may execute a control to display numerical information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 on the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440. ..

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of a flow of numerical information display processing, which is an example of processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 in this case.
First, the processing unit 410 determines the latest numerical value of the target numerical information (T1). Here, the target numerical information is, for example, when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, the difference between the players, the number of balls held, etc., and when the gaming machine is a slot machine, the difference between the players. It can be the number of medals, the number of medals held, etc.

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the update display condition for updating the display of the numerical value is satisfied (T3). Specifically, it is determined that the display of the numerical value is updated when the latest value of the target numerical information determined in T1 changes from the current numerical value stored in the storage unit 490. If it is determined that the update display condition is not satisfied (T3; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to T37. On the other hand, if it is determined that the update display condition is satisfied (T3; Yes), the processing unit 410 temporarily stores the latest value determined in T1 in the storage unit 490 as the update destination value (T5).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines in which direction the display of the numerical value is to be changed, addition or subtraction, based on the current numerical value stored in the storage unit 490 and the update destination numerical value (T7), and adds. If it is determined that the numerical value is changed in the direction (T7; addition), it is determined whether or not the update display flag is set to "ON" (T9). The update display flag is a flag indicating that the display of the numerical value is being updated, and the addition update display flag indicating that the display is being updated in the direction of addition and the display being updated in the direction of subtraction. This includes a subtraction update display flag indicating that it is present.

If it is determined that none of the above update display in-progress flags is "ON" (T9; No), the processing unit 410 starts executing the addition update display control (T11). Specifically, the numerical value currently being displayed is controlled to be sequentially changed to the update destination numerical value by, for example, vertical scrolling. Then, the processing unit 410 sets the addition update display flag to “ON” (T13). If it is determined that any of the above update display flags is "ON" (T9; Yes), the processing unit 410 sets the standby flag to "ON" (T15). The waiting flag is a flag indicating that the update display control is in the waiting state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the numerical value is changed in the subtraction direction (T7; subtraction), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the update display flag is set to "ON" (T17). If it is determined that none of the above update display in-progress flags is "ON" (T17; No), the processing unit 410 starts executing the subtraction update display control (T19). Specifically, the numerical value currently being displayed is controlled to be sequentially changed to the update destination numerical value by, for example, horizontal scrolling. Then, the processing unit 410 sets the subtraction update display flag to “ON” (T21). If it is determined that any of the above update display flags is "ON" (T17; Yes), the processing unit 410 sets the standby flag to "ON" (T23).

After T13, T15, T21 or T23, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the update display flag is "ON" (T25), and if it is determined to be "ON" (T25; Yes). , It is determined whether or not the update display control being executed is completed (T27). Then, if it is determined that the completion is completed (T27; Yes), the update display in-progress flag corresponding to the completed update display control is set to "OFF" (T29).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the waiting flag is set to "ON" (T31), and if it is determined that the waiting flag is set to "ON" (T31; Yes), the waiting is in progress. Execution of the update display control corresponding to the flag is started (T33). Then, the processing unit 410 sets the waiting flag to "OFF" (T35).

After that, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the processing (T37), and if it is determined to continue the processing (T37; No), returns the processing to T1. If it is determined that the processing is finished (T37; Yes), the processing unit 410 ends the numerical information display processing.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of the principle of update display control of numerical information in the above numerical information display processing. Here, the numerical information is used as the difference between the out (number of shots), which is the game value used by the player for the game, and the safe (number of payouts), which is the game value given to the player by the prize ball. A case where the data is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400 will be described as an example. However, from the player's point of view, the difference number calculated as a safe-out is displayed as the difference ball number.

As an example, while the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the above-mentioned high base state and is supported by an electric tulip-type accessory (electric chew) constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B (so-called electric support), the player Considers a case where a player hits a game ball and causes the game ball to win a prize in the second start winning opening. In this case, the data display device 400 executes the above-mentioned addition update display control and subtraction update display control based on the calculated number of difference balls when the time saving medium signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

Specifically, the data display device 400 calculates safe and out, respectively, based on the prize ball signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the out signal output from the out ball detector 200. The prize ball signal is output every time the first specified number of balls is paid out in the gaming machine 1, and the out signal is output every time the second specified number of balls is counted by the out ball detector 200. For example, assuming that the first specified number of balls and the second specified number of balls are "10 balls" respectively, the data display device 400 can calculate the number of difference balls using the safe and out calculated in units of 10 balls. ..

In the high base state, the player hits the game ball and aims to win the second start winning opening. At this time, when a game ball wins in the second start winning opening, a specified number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are awarded, so that the number of outs is increased by hitting the game ball and the safe is increased by the prize ball. Will be repeated. However, the number of difference balls usually gradually decreases due to the presence of a game ball that spills without winning in the second start winning opening.

In this case, the decrease in the number of difference balls is an update of numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player, and the subtraction display update control is executed. In this subtraction display update control, the number of difference balls displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is updated and displayed in the subtracting direction. At this time, it is controlled so that the liquid crystal display unit 430 does not display the progress of updating the number of difference balls.

Consider the case where the number of difference balls gradually decreases from "1000". Specifically, when the number of difference balls decreases from the state of "1000" to the state of "990", in the subtraction update control, the display of the number of difference balls "1000" is changed to "990" by, for example, side-scrolling. Update all at once.

Specifically, the numerical values of "1000" are collectively left-scrolled to "0990". In other words, the number of "1" in the thousand's place is shifted to the left to hide it, and the number of "000" in the hundred's place to the one's place is shifted to the left to make it from the thousand's place to the hundred's place. By shifting the numerical value of "9" on the display to the left to make it the ones place, it becomes "0009". Next, the number of "0" in the thousand's place is shifted to the left to hide it, and the number of "009" in the hundred's place to the one's place is shifted to the left to make it from the thousand's place to the hundred's place. By shifting the hidden numerical value of "9" to the left to make it the ones digit, it becomes "00099". Next, the number of "0" in the thousand's place is shifted to the left to hide it, and the number of "099" in the hundred's place to the one's place is shifted to the left to make it from the thousand's place to the hundred's place. By shifting the hidden "0" value to the left to make it the ones place, it becomes "0990".

Next, it is assumed that the jackpot is won in the high base state and the corresponding gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When controlled to the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened, and the winning ball is played by winning the game ball to the big winning opening. The number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) for one winning to the large winning opening is larger than the number of winning balls (for example, 3 balls) for one winning to the second starting winning opening, and the large winnings are made over multiple rounds. Since the control to open the mouth is performed, the safe against the out is greatly increased, and the number of difference balls is also rapidly increased accordingly.

In this case, the increase in the number of difference balls is an update of numerical information that is beneficial to the player, and the addition display update control is executed. In this addition display update control, the number of difference balls displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is updated and displayed in the increasing direction. At this time, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is controlled to display the progress of updating the number of difference balls.

For example, consider a case where the number of difference balls of the above players increases from "990" in the big hit game state. For example, when the number of difference balls increases from the state of "990" to the state of "1000", for example, the display of the number of difference balls "0990" is sequentially updated to "1000" by vertical scrolling.

Specifically, first, the numerical value "0" in the ones place of the displayed numerical value "0900" is scrolled downward to hide it, and the numerical value "1" is downward like a reel. Scroll to display in the first place. Next, the numerical value "1" in the ones place of the numerical value "0901" is scrolled downward to hide it, and the numerical value "2" is scrolled downwards like a reel to be displayed in the ones digit. .. After that, the same process is repeated, and the numerical value "0999" from the thousands to the ones digit "0999" is scrolled downward to hide it, and the numerical value "1000" is downward like a reel. Scroll to and display each in the thousands to ones.

In the update display control in the present embodiment, even if the numerical information of the update destination corresponds to the same numerical value, the update is performed depending on whether the addition update display control is executed or the subtraction update display control is executed. It is characterized by different modes (modes of operation in updating). That is, even if the numerical value of the update destination is the same numerical value (for example, 1000), the scroll mode is different depending on whether the addition update display control is executed or the subtraction update display control is executed, so that the update mode is different. It will be.

In the above example, the game machine 1 and the out-ball detector 200 are configured to output the prize ball signal and the out-ball signal in units of one ball, respectively, and the data display device 400 is safe and in units of one ball. The number of balls may be calculated by calculating each out.

Further, in the above example, the data display device 400 is configured to output, for example, a signal during the consecutive villas (in the middle of the consecutive villas) from the gaming machine 1 instead of the signal during the time reduction. , The above processing may be executed when the signal during the consecutive villas is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1. Further, in the above example, the high base state has been described as an example, but the same processing can be performed in the case of the low base state.

Further, in the above, the gaming machine is used as a slot machine, and the IN (number of medals used), which is the game value used by the player for the game, and the OUT (number of medals granted), which is the given game value given to the player. The difference number (the number of difference medals) may be used as numerical information. Further, the number of balls held by the player (in the case of a pachinko gaming machine) and the number of medals held (slot machine) may be used as numerical information.

For example, if the number of balls held is to be displayed as numerical information, the data display device 400 may calculate the number of balls held based on the ball payout signal and the ball counting signal output from the inter-unit counting unit 500. In this case, the above-mentioned update display control can be executed in any number of balls, regardless of whether the number of balls is increased by counting or decreased by paying out. For example, if the game balls are counted in units of one ball by the table-to-table counting unit 500, the addition / update display control of the number of balls held is executed in units of one ball based on the ball counting signal when the table-to-table counting unit 500 counts. do it. Further, if the game balls are paid out in units of 25 balls by paying out the table-to-table counting unit 500, the subtraction update display control of the number of balls held in units of 25 balls is performed based on the ball payout signal at the time of paying out the table-to-table counting unit 500. Just do it.

As a method of differentiating the update mode between the case of executing the addition update display control and the case of executing the subtraction update display control, the scroll mode described above may be different (vertical scroll and horizontal scroll). ), The display of the progress is different (whether or not the display of the progress is displayed) In addition, a method such as different the cycle of updating the numerical information and the time until the update is completed can be applied.

Further, in the above example, the numerical information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400, but the numerical information may be displayed on the seg display unit 440. Since the seg display unit 440 is composed of a 3-digit 7-segment display, the seg display unit 440 alone can display numerical values up to 3 digits. Further, as described in the above embodiment, it is also possible to display numerical information in a display pattern (liquid crystal seg display pattern) linked by the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440. In this case, the numerical information can be displayed. Numerical values of 4 digits or more can be displayed by linkage. Further, when displaying numerical information on the seg display unit 440, the order of lighting the 7-segments is different depending on whether the addition update display control is executed or the subtraction update display control is executed. The display control and the subtraction update display control may be distinguished from each other.

Further, in the above numerical information display processing, the update display control may be executed in real time without using the update display flag and the standby flag. That is, when a new update display condition is satisfied during execution of the update display control, the update display control corresponding to the newly established update display condition is started without waiting for the completion of the running update display control. You may do it.

[3-8-2. Recording of personal game history information]
In the recording of the personal game history information in the above embodiment, when the update of the personal game history information is restricted, the corresponding game of the gaming machine 1 in the period from the restriction to the release of the update of the personal game history information. The personal game history information may be corrected based on the information regarding the above.

Specifically, in the personal game history information recording process of FIG. 63, when the execution of the information recording start preparation process is started and "2" is set in the recording flag (M9; Yes → M11; No), or When the execution of the information recording end preparation process is started and the recording flag is set to "5" (M23; Yes → M25; No), it is stored in the first updating process of FIG. 64, which is executed thereafter. It is determined that "3" is not set in the flag (N3; No).

At this time, information for correcting the personal game history information based on the game machine signal output from the corresponding game machine 1 while executing the control to display the preparation screen (hereinafter, "correction information"). ) Is acquired and stored / updated. The execution of the correction information acquisition process is started. Then, the execution of the correction information acquisition process is continued for the period until "3" is set in the recording flag (hereinafter referred to as "update restriction period"), and it is determined that "3" is set in the recording flag. At this point (N3; Yes), the execution of the correction information acquisition process is terminated. Then, the correction information obtained in the correction information acquisition process is used to supplement the personal game history information in the update restriction period for correction. That is, the individual game history information may be corrected by using the difference of the individual game history information for the update restriction period.

Further, the hall computer 600 acquires and aggregates game information related to each game machine 1. Therefore, the hall computer 600 is requested to have the game information of the corresponding gaming machine 1 in the update restriction period, and the game information in the update restriction period provided by the hall computer 600 is used as the correction information to obtain the personal game history information. It may be corrected.

Further, as described above, it is correct when the data display device 400 does not properly communicate with the mobile terminal 250 at the time of receiving the operation, or when the recorded personal game history information is garbled. When there is a possibility that the personal game history information cannot be provided to the player, the correction information may be acquired and the personal game history information may be corrected in the same manner as described above.

Further, the hall computer 600 may perform the correction of the personal game history information instead of the data display device 400.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hall computer 600 determines whether or not the condition for changing the personal game history information is satisfied during the execution of the preparatory process in the data display device 400, and based on the determination result, determines. The personal game history information aggregated by the own device may be provided to the data display device 400.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the process relating to the storage of the personal game history information in this case, the request transmitted from the game device to the management device, the condition for transmitting the request, and the process on the management device side. The table associated with and is shown in the figure.
The requirements include requirements A to D, requirements M, and requirements R.

In the request A, the condition "information recording start operation is present (recording flag 1)" is defined, and "personal game history information A (at the time of information recording start operation) is stored" is defined as a process on the management device side. This requests the data display device 400 to request the hall computer 600 to record the personal game history information at the time of the information recording start operation (request A) when the information recording start operation is performed. means.

In the request B, the condition "information recording start preparation process completed (recording flag 2 and information recording start preparation process is not in progress)" is set as "personal game history information B (when information recording start preparation process is completed)" as a process on the management device side. ) Is stipulated respectively. This is a request (request B) from the data display device 400 to the hall computer 600 to record the personal game history information at the time when the information recording start preparation process is completed when the information recording start preparation process is completed. Means to do.

In the request C, the condition "there is an information recording end operation (recording flag 4)" is defined, and "the personal game history information C (at the time of the information recording end operation) is stored" is defined as the processing on the management device side. This requests the data display device 400 to request the hall computer 600 to record the personal game history information at the time of the information recording end operation (request C) when the information recording end operation is performed. means.

In the request D, the condition "information recording end preparation process completed (record flag 5 and information recording end preparation process is not in progress)" is set as "personal game history information D (information recording end preparation process completed)" as a process on the management device side. ) Is stipulated respectively. This is a request (request D) from the data display device 400 to the hall computer 600 to record the personal game history information at the time when the information recording end preparation process is completed when the information recording end preparation process is completed. Means to do.

The request M includes the conditions "(1) Recording of personal game history information on the data display device side (recording flag 3), (2) Information recording start preparation processing (recording flag 2 and information recording start preparation processing), ( "3) Information recording end preparation processing in progress (recording flag 5 and information recording end preparation processing in progress)" is defined, and "update personal game history information M" is defined as processing on the management device side. This is because the data display device 400 is updating the personal game history information on the data display device 400 side, executing the information recording start preparation process, and executing the information recording end preparation process. This means that the hall computer 600 is requested to update the personal game history information (request M).

In the request R, when the condition "at the end of information recording (recording flag 6)" is "individual game history information A ≠ B or individual game history information C ≠ D" as a process on the management device side, the individual game history information M is set. "Output to the data display device" is defined respectively. This requests the data display device 400 to provide the hall computer 600 with the personal game history information aggregated on the hall computer 600 side when the information recording process is completed on the data display device 400 side. Means.

The personal game history information A ≠ B is when the personal game history information at the time when the information recording start operation is accepted and the personal game history information at the time when the information recording start preparation process is completed are different, and the information recording start. It means that the game was played on the game machine 1 during the preparation process. Further, the personal game history information C ≠ D is when the personal game history information at the time when the information recording end operation is accepted and the personal game history information at the time when the information recording end preparation process is completed are different. It means that the game was played on the game machine 1 during the recording end preparation process. Therefore, when any of the conditions of the personal game history information A ≠ B and the personal game history information C ≠ D is satisfied, the personal game history information M aggregated on the hall computer 600 side is output to the data display device 400. By doing so, it is possible for the data display device 400 to acquire the correct personal game history information.

The data display device 400 and the hall computer 600 execute the process to which the above table is applied. Specifically, when the conditions specified in the above table are satisfied, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 makes a request associated with the conditions to the hall computer 600. The processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 receives a request from the data display device 400 and executes processing on the management device side associated with the request. When the request R is made, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not the condition of the individual game history information A ≠ B or the individual game history information C ≠ D is satisfied. Then, if it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the personal game history information M is output to the data display device 400. When the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 acquires the personal game history information M from the hall computer 600, the processing unit 410 displays information (access information to the server 980, etc.) that can identify the personal game history information M on the liquid crystal display unit 430. Let me.

Further, in the above embodiment, the data display device 400 may display at least a part of the recorded personal game history information on the liquid crystal display unit 430. For example, among the personal game history information, information that is highly necessary for the player (number of big hits, balls, difference balls, etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430, but information that is less necessary for the player (other than the above). Information) may not be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. Further, the personal game history information provided to the player may be all the personal game history information, but may be only the information to be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. In this case, the information not to be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is excluded from the personal game history information provided to the player, and the personal game history information composed only of the information displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is recorded. The same processing as in the above embodiment may be performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the personal game history information can be specified, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is displayed with a two-dimensional code in which the access information to the server 980 is encoded, but the personal game history information is specified. The method of outputting possible information is not limited to this. For example, by using non-contact communication, the IC writer of the data display device 400 writes the personal game history information itself (including compressed information) to the IC chip of the mobile terminal 250, thereby writing the personal game history information itself (including compressed information) to the mobile terminal 250. Personal game history information may be provided.

[4. Fourth Embodiment]
[4-1. System configuration]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the third gaming system 1000C in the present embodiment. The same components as those of the gaming system of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted again.

The third gaming system 1000C is a kind of a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on the gaming island, and a gaming device, an information display device, a recording medium processing device, and a rental device provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1. It includes a card unit 300, a data display device 400 which is a kind of gaming device and information display device provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1, a hall computer 600, a ball management computer 800, and a stand terminal 900. It is composed of.

The card unit 300 is installed at a position on the predetermined side of the gaming machine 1 in a one-to-one correspondence with the gaming machine 1, and is issued to a visitor player who has not registered as a member in the store. And the game card, which is a recording medium including the member card issued to the member player who has registered as a member in the store, can be accepted, and the owned game value specified from the accepted game card can be received. The process for enabling the game machine 1 is executed.

Specifically, the card unit 300 consumes the remaining amount, which is a valuable possession value specified from the gaming card, to rent out a gaming ball, which is a gaming medium used for gaming in the gaming machine 1, or for gaming. Based on the number of stored balls and the number of balls possessed, which are the number of owned game media specified from the card, the process of paying out the game ball, which is the game medium used for the game in the game machine 1, and the game ball acquired by the player. Perform various processes such as counting.

In the present embodiment, the card unit 300 relates to the calculation and display of the payout rate index value based on the unit setting data 693, which is the setting data output from the hall computer 600, as in the game system described above. Make various settings. Then, the card unit 300 calculates the payout rate and determines its suitability by the same method as the data display device 1200, and displays specific information based on these results on the liquid crystal display 313. Further, the card unit 300 counts the number of acquired balls, which is the number of game balls acquired by the player, as information on the game value owned by the player who plays with the corresponding game machine 1, and displays the liquid crystal display 313. indicate. Since various settings in the card unit 300, calculation and display of the payout rate, etc. can be realized by substantially the same method as in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[4-2. Signal and information flow]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of signals and information between each device of the third gaming system 1000C. In this figure, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the stand terminal 900 is not shown.

The gaming machine signal is output from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 300, the data display device 400, and the hall computer 600.

Further, an out signal is output from the out ball detector 200 attached to the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 300, the data display device 400, and the hall computer 600.

From the card unit 300, unit signals including a card insertion signal, a card ejection signal, a deposit signal, a consumption signal, a ball payout signal, a ball counting signal, and a unit error signal are transmitted to a data display device 400, a hall computer 600, and a ball management computer 800. Is output to.

Further, the card unit 300 outputs an authentication request signal for requesting authentication of the game card inserted in the own device to the ball management computer 800. The authentication request signal includes a unit ID which is an ID of the own device and a card ID (member card: membership card ID, visitor card: visitor card ID) recorded on the game card.

Further, the card unit 300 outputs the captured image data, which is the data of the captured image captured by the imaging unit 390, to the ball management computer 800. The ball management computer 800 and the hall computer 600 are connected by communication, and the ball management computer 800 is configured to be able to share and manage the captured image data acquired from the card unit 300 with the hall computer 600. ..

Similar to the above embodiment, the hall computer 600 outputs the display device setting data 691 to the data display device 400. Further, from the hall computer 600, the management device signal including the big hit running effect signal and the periodic notification signal is output to the data display device 400 as in the above embodiment.

Further, in addition to the above, the hall computer 600 includes a mode instruction signal for instructing a mode in the irradiation effect executed by the data display device 400 in the management device and outputs the mode instruction signal to the data display device 400. The data display device 400 executes the irradiation effect in a mode corresponding to the mode instruction signal output from the hall computer 600.

From the hall computer 600, unit setting data 693, which is setting data for the card unit 300 to perform various settings, is output to the card unit 300.

The ball management computer 800 executes the authentication process according to the authentication request signal output from the card unit 300, and transmits the authentication signal to the card unit 300. The authentication signal includes an authentication result (OK / NG). If the authentication result is OK, the card information associated with the card ID included in the authentication request signal is output to the card unit 300.

[4-3. Card unit configuration]
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance configuration of the card unit 300.
On the front surface of the card unit 300, there is a multifunction lamp 301 which is composed of full-color LEDs and can notify the state of the card unit 300 by lighting in a plurality of colors, and a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills. A payout button 311 for accepting a counting and paying operation for paying out the counted number of balls, a card insertion slot 309 for inserting a membership card and a visitor card, and a protrusion from the front of the device to the front side of the device. A formed display unit 355 and an image pickup unit 390 having a camera are provided.

The display unit 355 has a liquid crystal display 313 in which the touch panel 314 is integrally configured, and each display item displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 can be input by touching the touch panel 314 with a finger. Further, the display unit 355 is provided with an IR light receiving unit 315 that receives an infrared signal from a setting remote controller possessed by a store clerk, converts it into an electric signal, and outputs the signal.

The card insertion slot 309 provided on the front surface of the card unit 300 is connected to the card slot 392 of the card reader / writer 327 built in at a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 309, and is connected to the card slot 392 via the card insertion slot 309. A game card (visitor card, membership card) can be inserted into the card slot 392.

The game card is an IC having a non-volatile memory for storing various data and a control unit for rewriting and reading these recorded information and performing non-contact communication with an external reader / writer device. An IC card on which a chip is mounted is used, and a membership card ID / visitor card ID that can identify each card is stored in advance in these game cards in a non-rewritable manner. Then, the type is identifiable from the card ID, and prepaid balance data and the like that can specify the prepaid balance are stored.

The membership card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member at a store, and the member ID given to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, as will be described later, the member player using the membership card shall use the game balls once acquired and counted for the game again on the next day or later, or store balls that can be used for prize exchange. However, the membership card does not directly record the number of balls stored, which is the number of game balls in which the balls were stored, and the number of balls stored is recorded in the ball management computer 8 as described later. In, by storing it in association with the membership card ID, it can be specified from the membership card ID.

Further, the number of balls held based on the number of locally counted balls counted by the counting payout unit 380 is not directly recorded on the membership card, and the number of balls held is also associated with the membership card ID as described later. By being stored, it can be identified from the member card ID and the member ID, and the number of balls can be used for games in each card unit 300 in the store only on that day, and is not shown. It can be used for prize exchange in the prize exchange POS terminal.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls held based on the number of locally counted balls counted by the counting payout unit 380 is not directly recorded in the visitor card, and as will be described later, the visitor card ID in the ball management computer 8 By storing and managing it in association with the above, it can be specified from the visitor card ID, and can be used for prize exchange in a prize exchange POS terminal (not shown).

In this embodiment, the player performs various operations on the card unit 300 by operating the touch panel 314. For example, the display unit 355 displays a menu button or table data for selecting a menu. Operation of the table data button for the purpose, the replay button for performing the replay game using the membership card ID recorded on the membership card and the number of stored balls specified by the membership ID when the membership card is accepted. A button may be provided.

Further, inside the display unit 355, a liquid crystal display 313 described later and a switch corresponding to an operation button are provided, and these are connected to a display control board 329 provided at a position in the device corresponding to the display unit 355. By doing so, the display control of the liquid crystal display 313, the input position detection by the touch panel 314, and the like are performed by the display control board 329.

At the upper position in the card unit 300, a bill is connected to a bill insertion slot 302, and the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in to identify its authenticity and bill type, and the identification result is approximately in the center of the device. A banknote identification unit 302a for outputting to a control unit 305, which will be described later, is provided in the unit, and various banknotes (10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 2,000 yen, and 1,000 yen) are provided in the banknote identification unit 302a. ) Can be accepted.

Further, a control unit 305 that controls the operation of the card unit 300 is provided at a substantially central position of the card unit 300 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the card unit 300, and as will be described later. Various operations of the card unit 300 are controlled by the control unit 305.

Further, the card unit 300 and the gaming machine 1 are configured to be able to send and receive a lending-related signal associated with the lending of a plurality of gaming balls predetermined as a payout unit and a payout-related signal associated with the payout of the gaming ball. For example, the lending-related signals include a lending request signal for causing the gaming machine 1 to lend a game ball from the card unit 300, a stand terminal lending completion signal, a stand READY signal, and a unit READY signal output from the gaming machine 1. , Signals such as a terminal rental request completion confirmation signal are included.

A unit invalid signal is output from the card unit 300. The card unit 300 has, for example, a fraudulent radio wave detection function, a vibration detection function, and a function for discriminating counterfeit cards and counterfeit banknotes as functions for detecting fraud of a player, and when fraudulent radio waves and vibrations are detected by these functions. Or, when it is determined that a counterfeit card or a counterfeit banknote has been used, the unit invalid signal is externally output via the external output board.

Further, a unit abnormality signal is output from the card unit 300. The card unit 300 has a function of detecting an insertion / ejection failure of a game card and a function of detecting a counting / payout failure by the counting / payout unit 380 as a function of detecting an abnormality. When it is detected or when the counting / paying out failure is detected by the counting / paying out unit 380, the unit abnormality signal is externally output via the external output board.

The prepaid balance is an integer part of the quotient calculated by the formula "card balance ÷ unit amount", and the card balance is the balance in yen units recorded on the game card. For example, the unit amount can be 100 yen, and if the card balance is 10,000 yen, the prepaid balance is 100.

The above balance may be directly recorded on the game card, or may be managed by a management device such as a ball management computer 800 without being recorded on the game card. When recording the remaining amount on the game card, the card unit 300 may specify the remaining amount owned by the player by reading the remaining amount from the received game card. When the balance is not recorded on the game card, the card unit 300 outputs the card ID of the received game card to the management device, and acquires the balance data associated with the card ID from the management device. Therefore, the balance owned by the player may be specified.

The card unit 300 stores the balance specified as described above in the storage unit 320 as prepaid balance data or card balance data. Further, the card unit 300 updates the remaining amount data by consuming the remaining amount for the game or adding the remaining amount by deposit while the game card is being accepted. Then, in the operation of recording the remaining amount on the game card, the card unit 300 causes the game card to record the remaining amount when the game card is returned. Further, in the operation of managing the remaining amount with the management device, the remaining amount data is output to the management device at the time of returning the game card or after the return.

In the present embodiment, the term "balance" will be described as meaning the balance associated with the game card. That is, it means the balance directly recorded on the game card by deposit and the balance managed by the upper management device in association with the card ID and member ID of the game card by deposit.

Further, in the present specification, a ball that a player has acquired by playing a game with a pachinko machine and is deposited in a hall is referred to as a "stored ball". In addition, the number of stored balls deposited in the hall is referred to as the "number of stored balls". The number of stored balls is managed by the management device. In principle, the number of stored balls cannot be recorded on the membership card, and the number of stored balls managed by the management device is transmitted to the recording medium processing device in response to the acceptance of the membership card by the recording medium processing device. .. In addition, the balls acquired by the player on the current business day are referred to as "same-day savings", and the balls acquired and saved by the member players before the current business day are referred to as "past savings". Although contrary to the principle, the number of stored balls may be recorded on the membership card.

The number of balls saved by the player on the day is determined as the number of balls saved by the player on that day, and is managed as the number of past balls saved on the next business day or later, depending on the fulfillment of the predetermined conditions. The predetermined condition can be set as, for example, that the closing process is performed after the store is closed on the day. The closing process is due to the fact that the closing time has reached a predetermined closing time (for example, midnight, midnight, midnight 2:00), the store manager has performed the closing process, and the store is closed. This is executed when conditions such as the power of the management device being turned off once and the power of the management device being turned on for business on the next business day are satisfied. By executing this closing process, the number of stored balls on the day is added to the number of stored balls in the past and reset, and is managed as the number of stored balls in the past on the next business day or later.

Further, in the present specification, the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the pachinko machine is referred to as "mochi ball". In addition, the number of balls recorded on the visitor card is referred to as the "number of balls held" in order to distinguish it from the balls stored on the day associated with the membership card.

Further, in the present specification, a pachinko ball that can be fired by the game machine 1 and is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount, a possession ball, and a stored ball is referred to as a “game ball”.

The image pickup unit 390 is a position where a player playing a game on the corresponding game machine 1 can take an image of the player's face while sitting on a game chair installed on the front side of the game machine 1, specifically. , Is provided in the center of the front plate of the card unit 300. The image pickup unit 390 is configured to be able to take an image of the player under the control of the processing unit 310.

FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the card unit 300.
The card unit 300 is a control unit that provides various functions of the card unit 300 by controlling each part of the bill identification unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, the display control board 329, and the card unit 300 by a control program. It is composed of 305, and the bill identification unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, and the display control board 329 are connected to the control unit 305 so that various data can be transmitted and received.

The card reader / writer 327 reads and writes recorded information such as the (member) card ID, the member ID (member card only), and the prepaid balance data recorded in the membership card inserted from the card insertion slot 309 and the visitor card. I do.

The control unit 305 includes a processing unit 310, a storage unit 320, and a clock unit 335.

The processing unit 310 is a control device and an arithmetic unit configured to include a processor such as a CPU or DSP that collectively controls the card unit 300 and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC.

The storage unit 320 is a storage device including a memory such as a ROM, a flash ROM, an EEPROM, and a RAM. In the present embodiment, the storage unit 320 pays out the card unit processing program 321 read by the processing unit 310 and executed as the card unit processing, the local counting ball number data 323 which is the data of the local counting ball number, and the payout. The rate total data 325, the reception card data 327 which is the data of the received game card, the captured image data 329 which is the data of the captured image captured by the imaging unit 390, and the unit setting which is output from the hall computer 600. Data 693 and are stored.

The payout rate total data 325 is data that stores the total value related to the payout rate in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and is the same data as the payout rate total data 1295 described in the second embodiment.

Further, the card unit processing program 321 includes a payout rate index value calculation program 321a executed as a payout rate index value calculation process and a display processing program 321b executed as a display process as subroutines.

The control unit 305 is connected so as to be able to send and receive various signals accompanying the lending of the gaming ball to and from the prize ball control board (not shown) provided in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and as described above. By connecting to the information output board of the gaming machine 1 via a signal cable, the gaming machine signal can be input.

Further, the control unit 305 is connected to an out-ball detector 200 provided at a position below the corresponding gaming machine 1, and an out signal by the out-ball detector 200 can be input, and these out-ball detectors can be input. The payout rate aggregated data 325 is updated in response to the input of the out signal from 200.

Further, the control unit 305 can grasp whether or not there is an operation on the touch panel 314. When the operation on the touch panel 314 is detected, the control unit 305 executes the process corresponding to the operation.

Further, as described above, the control unit 305 is provided with a balance indicator provided in the operation unit of the corresponding gaming machine 1, a lending button switch for detecting the operation of the lending button, and a membership card or a visitor card being accepted. A return button switch that detects the operation of the return button that is operated when returning is connected, and the operation of the lending button and the operation of the return button can be detected, and the display control of these balance indicators is performed.

The control unit 305 outputs various information from the IR light receiving unit 315 in response to transmission from the remote controller, and various information input from the display control board 329 in response to the operation of various buttons provided on the display unit 355 and the operation of the touch panel. , The full color provided in the multifunction lamp connected to the control unit 305 by receiving the money identification information by the bill identification unit 302a, the card insertion information from the card reader / writer 327, the storage status information of the visitor card, and the like. Overall operation control such as lighting control of each LED such as LED301a, control of card reader / writer 327, display control board 329, display control of balance display, etc. is performed.

In addition, the control unit 305 performs a card reception process for determining whether or not the membership card or visitor card inserted in the card insertion slot 309 can be used, and a ball lending using the remaining amount specified from the game card being accepted. Depending on the loan processing to be performed, the receipt of money, the payment to the remaining amount on the game card being accepted, or the issuance / payment processing to write the prepaid balance on a new game card and issue it, the return operation by the return button Of the number of game media owned (the number of locally counted balls plus the number of saved balls and the number of balls held) by the return processing of returning the membership card and visitor card being accepted by A process such as a payout process for paying out a game ball having a predetermined number of unit balls is executed.

Further, the control unit 305 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 600 or a ball management computer 800 connected to a local area network (LAN) via a HUB so as to be capable of data communication with each of these computers. It is possible to send and receive various data.

Further, the display control board 329 connected to the control unit 305 includes a liquid crystal display 313 and a touch panel 314 constituting the display unit 355, switches corresponding to various operation buttons 316, an IR light receiving unit 315, and the above-mentioned replay display unit. Electronic components such as the LED 320a provided in the LCD control board 329 are connected, and the operation information of the touch panel 314, the operation information of various switches, and the information based on the output signal output from the IR light receiving unit 315 are connected to the display control board 329. It is output to the control unit 305 via.

On the display control board 329 of the present embodiment, a display drive circuit (not shown) for driving the display of the liquid crystal display 313 and a position where the pressing operation is performed based on the output signal from the touch panel 314 are specified and specified. An input position detection circuit (not shown) that outputs input position information, a VDP (not shown) that performs processing related to the display image displayed on the display unit 355, and a VROM (not shown) that stores image data used for menu display and the like. (Omitted), VRAM (not shown) that temporarily stores display data to be displayed on the display unit 355, and judgment and processing associated with input from various switches and touch panels, independent of the control unit 305, based on the processing program. A display control microcomputer or the like to be implemented is mounted, and various display screens can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 constituting the display unit 355 based on the display data (page data) output from the control unit 305. Has been done.

The card unit 300 is configured to be able to accept a game card, and the card unit 300 that has received the game card executes the above-mentioned ball lending process according to the prepaid balance specified from the game card. In addition, the above payout process is executed according to the number of stored balls and the number of balls held from the game card.

The front surface of the card unit 300 is provided with a bill insertion slot for inserting bills and a card insertion slot 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card. The membership card or visitor card inserted in the card insertion slot 309 is accepted by the card reader / writer, and the information recorded on the card is read. The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot is taken in by a currency classifier (not shown) to identify its authenticity and bill type.

When the player finishes the game and receives the card returned from the card unit 300, the ball held in the card unit 300 is temporarily stored in the ball management computer 8 as a stored ball, and the player is the player of the card. When a card is inserted into the same or another card unit 300 again on the same day as the day when it was returned, only the balls for the day that were once stored as stored balls are stored in the card unit 300 again, and the balls are stored in the card unit 300. You may add game balls in the range so that you can play.

Further, a sound output control board 319 is connected to the control unit 305. The sound output control board 319 is connected to the sound output unit 350, and is controlled to output various sounds from the sound output unit 350 according to the control of the control unit 305.

Further, at the lowermost position of the card unit 300, game balls are counted and taken in, and the counted game balls are counted for the maximum fraction, that is, only the maximum value of the fraction less than the number of payout units in the corresponding game machine 1. A counting and paying unit 380 is provided for storing and counting the game balls having a fraction less than the unit. Hereinafter, "fractions less than a unit" will be referred to as "fractions".

In addition, instead of storing and paying out the game balls in the counting and payout unit 380 of the card unit 300, a game ball storage and circulation device conventionally known is configured on the game island, and the game balls are stored and discharged from this game ball storage and circulation device. May be paid out.

A horizontally long box-shaped connecting box 340 arranged between the lower plate 24 of the gaming machine 1 and the repair plate of the gaming island is connected to the counting and payout unit 380.

The connecting box 340 includes a terminal box (not shown) having a relatively large thickness in the height direction formed on the terminal side of the connection box 340, and a terminal box and a counting and paying unit having a relatively small thickness in the height direction. It is composed of a path box (not shown) formed so as to connect the connecting portion with and.

The connecting box 340 is connected to the counting and payout unit 380 so that the terminal box is located below the lower plate 24, and the game ball discharged from the lower plate 24 is placed on the upper surface of the terminal box. A loading portion 345 having a hopper-shaped loading is formed. Further, at the lower front position of the terminal box, there is an open / close shutter that the player can open and close and is urged to be normally closed, and the fraction is refunded (returned) from the counting payout unit 380. A return port 342 is provided so that the game ball can be discharged.

Further, the upper position in the path box is provided so as to be inclined toward the counting and paying unit 380, and two flow paths that guide the game ball thrown into the charging unit 345 to the counting and paying unit 380 in a natural flow. A counting passage 343 is provided. Further, a return passage 344 is provided at a position below the counting passage 343 so as to be inclined toward the return port 342 and guides the game ball paid out from the counting payout unit 380 to the return port 342 in a natural flow. ..

A counting lever 341 is provided at the upper position on the front surface of the terminal box 340a so that the player can slide the counting lever 341. The opening / closing shutter 346 provided at the entrance to the counting passage 343 is opened.

Inside the counting payout unit 380 to which the connecting box 340 is connected, an inflow path which is connected to the counting passage 343 and is provided so as to incline from the front side of the card unit 300 toward the inward side of the card unit 300 is provided. At the terminal position of the inflow path, a counting sensor (not shown) for detecting and counting the game balls flowing down the inflow path is provided for each flow path of each line, and counting is performed through the counting passage 343. The game balls that have flowed into the payout unit 380 are detected by the counting sensor and counted. When counting by the counting sensor, a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the counting payout unit 380 to the control unit 305 in response to the detection of one game ball. The control unit 305 adds 1 to the number of stored balls each time the detection signal is input.

The card unit 300 stores the number of balls counted by the counting payout unit 380 in the storage unit 320 as the local counting ball number data 323. When the game card is returned, the card unit 300 transmits the unit ID, the card ID, and the local counting ball number data 323 to the ball management computer 8. If the game card being accepted is a visitor card, the number of locally counted balls stored in the local counting ball number data 323 is recorded in the visitor card as the number of balls.

The ball management computer 800 adds and updates the number of locally counted balls to the number of stored balls / the number of balls held on the day based on the unit ID, the card ID, and the number of locally counted balls data 323 transmitted from the card unit 300.

Specifically, when the type of the card ID is the membership card ID, the ball management computer 800 adds the number of balls stored locally to the number of balls stored on the day of the ball storage management data of the member card management data corresponding to the member card ID. The number of local counting balls specified from the data 323 is added and updated.

Further, when the type of the card ID is the visitor card ID, the ball management computer 800 uses the number of balls in the ball management data of the visitor card management data corresponding to the visitor card ID as the number of balls in the local counting ball number data 323. The number of local counting balls specified from is added and updated.

[4-4. process]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of a flow of card unit processing executed by the processing unit 310 of the card unit 300 according to the card unit processing program 321 stored in the storage unit 320.

First, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not it is the setting timing of the own device (R1). The setting timing can be, for example, the timing when the power of the own device is turned on. In this case, the setting timing may be determined by confirming whether or not the set flag indicating that the display content or the operation content of the own device has been set is set to "ON". The set flag may be set to "ON" after the setting process is executed, and may be cleared to "OFF" when the power of the card unit 300 is turned off at the end of business of the store or the like.

When it is determined that the setting timing is reached (determined that the set flag is "OFF") (R1; Yes), the processing unit 310 requests the hall computer 600 for unit setting data 693, and the hall computer 600 requests the unit setting data 693. Acquire unit setting data 693 (R3).

Next, the processing unit 310 executes the setting process (R5). Since the setting method in this setting process is substantially the same as the setting method in the data display device 1200 described in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processing unit 310 starts executing the local counting ball number data update processing (R7). Specifically, the process of updating the local counting ball number data 327 of the storage unit 320 is started by adding the counted number of balls to the local counting ball number based on the counting result of the counting payout unit 380.

Further, the processing unit 31 starts executing the payout rate total data update process (R9). Specifically, a process of calculating an index value necessary for calculating a payout rate actual measurement value based on a game machine signal transmitted from the corresponding game machine 1 and updating the payout rate aggregate data 325 of the storage unit 320. Start.

Next, the processing unit 310 executes a game enablement process (R10). Specifically, based on the player's operation on the own device, a process such as a ball lending process or a ball payout process is executed so that the player can play a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1.

After that, the processing unit 310 executes the payout rate index value calculation process according to the payout rate index value calculation program 321a stored in the storage unit 320 (R11). Since this payout rate index value calculation process can be realized by the same process as the process described in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted again.

Next, the processing unit 310 executes a payout rate suitability determination process (R13). Since this payout rate suitability determination process can also be realized by the same process as the process described in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted again.

Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the appropriateness determination result of the payout rate is appropriate (R15), and if it is determined that it is inappropriate (R15; No), the gaming machine ID of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is used. It is output to the hall computer 600 (R17). By doing so, the store manager can grasp the gaming machine 1 whose payout rate may be inappropriate, and opens the glass door frame 3a of the gaming machine 1 to the store clerk. Can be instructed to check the display monitor 26.

After R17, or when the appropriateness determination result of the payout rate is appropriate (R15; Yes), the processing unit 310 executes the display processing according to the display processing program 321b stored in the storage unit 320 (R19). ). Since this display process can also be realized by the same process as the process described in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted again.

Next, the processing unit 310 causes the imaging unit 390 to perform imaging, and executes an imaging process in which the captured image data is stored in the storage unit 320 as the captured image data 329 (R21). Then, the processing unit 310 controls to transmit the captured image data 329 to the ball management computer 800 (R23).

Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not to end the processing (R25), and if it is determined to continue the processing (R25; No), returns the processing to R1. If it is determined that the processing is finished (R25; Yes), the card unit processing is finished.

[4-5. Display screen]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 constituting the display unit 355 of the card unit 300.

FIG. 75 (1) is an example of a card forgotten notification screen for alerting the player to forget to remove the game card, and the message "Be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed.

Further, in the lower right portion of the screen, the payout rate suitability information display 313A is displayed. The payout rate suitability information display 313A is the same as the payout rate suitability information display 1230A displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of FIG. 39 (1), and displays the suitability of the payout rate according to the color change mode. Is.

Further, below the screen for forgetting to remove the card, the number of acquired game balls, which is the number of game balls acquired by the player by playing the game on the corresponding game machine 1, is displayed. From this display, the player can know the number of balls that he / she has acquired by the game.

FIG. 75 (2) is a diagram showing another example of the card forgotten notification screen.
On this card forgetting notification screen, the payout rate suitability information display 313B is displayed at the lower right of the screen. The payout rate suitability information display 313B is the same as the payout rate suitability information display 1230B displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of FIG. 39 (2), and displays the payout rate suitability according to the meter mode. be.

FIG. 75 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the card forgotten notification screen.
On this card forgetting notification screen, the payout rate suitability information display 313C is displayed at the lower right of the screen. The payout rate suitability information display 313B is the same as the payout rate suitability information display 1230C displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of FIG. 39 (3), and displays the payout rate suitability according to the error mode. be.

Here, an example is illustrated in which the liquid crystal display 313 is displayed with the payout rate suitability information in the same display mode as the payout rate suitability information displays 1230A to 1230C described with reference to FIG. It goes without saying that the liquid crystal display 313 may display the payout rate suitability information in the same display mode as the information display 1230D to 1230F.

[4-6. Data display device processing]
The processing executed by the data display device 400 in the third gaming system 1000C is the same as the processing of the data display device 400 in the second gaming system 1000B. In particular, as described above, the data display device 400 is configured to be capable of performing an operation effect and an irradiation effect.

In the crime prevention mode, as described above, the orientation of the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b is changed so that the face of the player playing the game on the gaming machine can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the captured image data 329, which is the data of the captured image captured by the imaging unit 390 of the card unit 300, is configured to be transmitted to the ball management computer 800.

As a result, in the crime prevention mode, even if the player's face is unclear due to the low illuminance of the light emitting unit 480 or the like, the image pickup unit 390 can clearly project the player's face. It plays the role of lighting, and it becomes easy for the store to identify the player who has committed an illegal act such as a goto act or a theft act. Further, in the crime prevention mode, since the player's face is illuminated with light, it is assumed that the player has a feeling of strangeness different from the normal time, and the effect of deterring illegal acts can be expected.

[4-7. Action effect]
In the third gaming system 1000C, a card unit 300 and a data display device 400 are provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The card unit 300 includes a liquid crystal display 313 which is a display means. The liquid crystal display 313 is used during the non-big hit (in the non-advantageous state) with respect to the number of outs (used game value) which is the game value used by the player during the non-big hit (in the non-advantageous state) in the gaming machine 1. The payout rate standard information (reference relative information), which is information on the standard of the payout rate (relative value), which is the ratio of the number of payouts (acquired game value), which is the acquired game value, and the payout rate on the corresponding gaming machine 1. Payout rate actually measured value (measured relative value), payout rate suitability information (specific information) based on the measured value, and the acquired game ball which is the number of game balls acquired by the player playing the game on the corresponding game machine 1. The number and can be displayed.
According to this, it is possible to confirm the payout rate suitability information based on the payout rate standard information regarding the payout rate standard during the non-big hit of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the actual measurement value of the payout rate. As a result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the payout rate of the gaming machine 1 is as designed.

Further, the data display device 400 has a processing unit 410 and a light emitting unit capable of executing an irradiation effect of irradiating light toward the front region of the gaming machine 1 when the corresponding gaming machine 1 starts controlling the jackpot gaming state. A unit 480 is provided.
According to this, it is possible to give the player a sufficient special feeling by the irradiation effect.

As with the data display device 400, it is also possible to have the card unit 300 execute the irradiation effect. In this case, the store may be able to set which of the game devices, the card unit 300 and the data display device 400, is to execute the irradiation effect via the hall computer 600, the setting remote controller 700, or the like.

[5. Other embodiments]
The embodiment to which the present invention is applicable is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. The same configurations as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted again.

[5-1. Gaming machine]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the gaming machine is not limited to this.

For example, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko gaming machine called a right-handed gaming machine may be applied. In the right-handed machine, in the normal state, the left-handed hit is mainly aimed at winning the first starting winning opening (navel), and when the big hit winning is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the right-handing is the big winning opening (attacker). In the high-probability / high-base state or low-probability / high-base state that is controlled after that, the aim is mainly to win the second starting winning opening (electric chew).

In this case, the calculation target of the payout rate in the low base state is the number of payouts paid out by the prize balls by winning the prizes in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening provided in the left-handed area, and the high base state. The calculation target of the payout rate in the above may be the number of payouts paid out by the prize balls by winning the prizes in the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening provided in the right-handed area. If the gaming machine does not have a general winning slot, the payout rate calculation target in the low base state may be only the first starting winning slot, and the payout rate calculation target in the high base state may be limited to the second starting winning slot. ..

Further, a slot machine capable of playing with a game medal may be used as the game machine according to the present invention. In this case, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player are various challenge time (assist time (AT), assist replay time (ART), etc.) states and bonuses (regular bonus (RB), big bonus (BB), etc.). As the state, the same processing as that of the above embodiment may be performed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to conventional pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, but also uses an enclosing pachinko gaming machine in which a gaming ball is enclosed and circulated, and a gaming point (holding point). It may be a game point type slot machine.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming machine signal output from an external output board when the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine. Here, a slot machine 1'equipped with an ART lamp (light emitting means) that can be controlled to a bonus state and an assist replay time (ART) state and can notify by light emission that the control to the ART state has been confirmed is provided. Let's take an example.

From the external output board of the slot machine, for example, a BB signal, an RB signal, a start signal, an IN signal, an OUT signal, a lamp emission signal, and a security signal are configured to be output as a game machine signal. Has been done.
The BB signal is a signal that is set to the output state when the slot machine is controlled to the big bonus (BB) state.
The RB signal is a signal that is set to the output state when the slot machine is controlled to the regular bonus (RB) state.
The start signal is a signal that is output when one game is completed in the slot machine.
The IN signal is a signal for making it possible to specify the number of medals inserted into the slot machine by an external device, and is output every time a first specified number of medals (for example, 3 medals) are inserted. It can also be rephrased as a medal insertion signal.
The OUT signal is a signal for making it possible to specify the number of medals to be paid out from the slot machine by an external device, and is output every time a second specified number (for example, 10) of medals is paid out by winning a prize. It can be rephrased as a medal payout signal.
The lamp emission signal is a signal that is output when the ART lamp emits light.

In the data display device 400 provided corresponding to such a slot machine 1', operation effect and irradiation effect are executed based on the game machine signal output from the slot machine 1', as in the above embodiment. Can be done. For example, in the above embodiment, a jackpot operation effect for notifying that a jackpot has been won is executed based on a jackpot signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1, but in this example, it is output from the corresponding slot machine 1'. Based on the BB signal and the RB signal to be generated, it is possible to execute a bonus operation effect for notifying that the bonus has been won.

Further, when the lamp emission signal is received from the corresponding slot machine 1', the data display device 400 can specify that the ART has been confirmed in the corresponding slot machine 1'. Therefore, an ART operation effect for notifying that the ART has been confirmed may be executed based on the lamp emission signal output from the corresponding slot machine 1'.

Further, in this example, the lamp emission signal is externally output from the slot machine 1', but the lamp emission signal may not be output externally from the slot machine 1'. In this case, for example, when a photodetector (optical sensor) for detecting the light emission of the ART lamp of the corresponding slot machine 1'is provided in the data display device 400, and the light emission of the ART lamp is detected by this photodetector. In addition, it may be specified that the ART is confirmed in the corresponding slot machine 1', and the above-mentioned ART operation effect may be executed.

[5-2. Game equipment]
In the above embodiment, the gaming device (information display device) according to the present invention is a data display device 400 including a liquid crystal display unit 430 formed on the base unit 401 and a seg display unit 440 formed on the door unit 403. However, the game device is not limited to this.

Specifically, in the above embodiment, in the data display device 400, the seg display unit 440 is configured to be rotatable, and the operation effect by rotating the seg display unit 440 has been described as feasible. However, the display unit does not necessarily have to be configured to be rotatable, and a display unit that does not rotate but is movable may be configured. For example, a data display device including a liquid crystal display unit formed on the front surface of the housing and a seg display unit configured to be slidable in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side of the liquid crystal display unit is configured, and such data is configured. The display device may be a gaming device according to the present invention.

Further, although the position does not change (although it does not displace), a data display device having a display unit configured to be rotatable at the same position is configured, and in such a data display device, an operation effect is produced by rotating the display unit. May be feasible.

Further, a gaming device may be configured in which a part of the exterior other than the display unit is movable or rotatable. For example, a gaming device including a hat-shaped movable accessory may be configured, and the motion effect may be executed by operating the movable accessory. In addition to this, a gaming device including a three-dimensional movable accessory that can operate as a gimmick (device) may be configured, and an operation effect may be executed by operating the movable accessory.

Further, a movable accessory that can operate as the above gimmick may be detachably configured on the gaming device. In this case, for example, a movable accessory unique to each model of the gaming machine is designed, and the movable accessory corresponding to the model of the gaming machine in the store is attached to the corresponding gaming device to operate. You may. Further, for the same game island, the same type of movable accessory may be attached to the game device to operate. By doing so, it is possible to realize a motion effect with a sense of unity, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the entire island.

Further, in the data display device 400 of the above embodiment, a data display device may be configured in which the left and right door portions 403 are fixed in a state of being opened 90 degrees and the door portions 403 are configured to be immovable. In this case, since the left and right seg display units 440 are fixed so as to face the side (left-right direction) of the corresponding gaming machine, the seg display unit 440 can be seen even from a player at a distant position in the store. It is possible to easily visually recognize the information displayed on the machine, which makes it easier for the player to select a machine, and the effect of increasing the operating rate of the game machine can be expected.

Further, a data display device including a non-movable display unit having two different display methods may be configured. For example, a data display device may be configured in which a seg display unit (three digits) and a liquid crystal display unit are arranged side by side on the front surface of the housing.

[5-3. Management device]
In the above embodiment, the management device according to the present invention has been described as the hall computer 600, but instead of the hall computer 600, the ball management computer 800 or the medal management computer 16 may be used as the management device according to the present invention.

Further, a member management computer that manages member information and a card management computer that manages card information may be used as the management device according to the present invention. Further, a computer having two or more functions among these management computers may be used as the management device according to the present invention.

Specifically, in the above embodiment, the process of generating and distributing the display device setting data 691 and the unit setting data 693 in the management process executed by the hall computer 600 is performed not by the hall computer 600 but by the ball management computer. It may be executed by a management device such as 800, a member management computer, or a card management computer.

[5-4. Game system]
The gaming system described in the above embodiment is merely an example of the gaming system for realizing the present invention, and it is needless to say that the design can be appropriately changed.

For example, in the above embodiment, the game system is configured in which the signal output from the game machine is directly input to the game device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal output from the game machine is input to the management device. A gaming system that is input and these signals are indirectly input to the gaming device via the management device may be configured.

Further, in the above embodiment, the card unit 300 is described as having the counting payout unit 380 which is the counting means, but it is also possible to prevent the gaming device from having the counting means. For example, the hall computer 600 may calculate the number of balls to be ejected or the number of difference balls based on the game machine signal output from each game machine 1.

Specifically, for example, the hall computer 600 calculates the number of difference balls for each gaming machine 1 based on the prize ball signal output from the gaming machine 1 and the out signal output from the out ball detector 200. Then, information such as the number of counting balls and the number of difference balls may be output to the gaming device.

Further, although it is different from the above embodiment, when the winning combination ratio or the continuous ratio calculated in the gaming machine 1 is an inappropriate value, a signal indicating that fact (for example, a payout rate abnormality signal) is sent to the gaming device. The gaming device may be configured to output, and the gaming device may execute predetermined notification based on the payout rate abnormality signal output from the gaming machine 1.

For example, when the game device is a data display device 400, 1200, when the data display device 400, 1200 receives a payout rate abnormality signal from the corresponding game machine 1, it indicates that the payout rate is inappropriate. Players and stores indicate that the payout rate is inappropriate by displaying a message on the display unit, outputting a similar voice message or warning sound from the sound output unit, or making the light emitting unit emit light in red. You may notify the clerk of. The same applies to the case where the gaming device is the card unit 300.

Further, in the above embodiment, the management device such as the hall computer 600 does not make the gaming device calculate the actual measurement value of the payout rate, but the management device such as the hall computer 600 outputs the gaming machine signal and the out-ball detector from the gaming machine 1. The actual measurement value of the payout rate may be calculated based on the out signal output from the 200, and the calculated payout rate may be output to the gaming device. In this case, the gaming device determines the suitability of the payout rate actual measurement value based on the payout rate actual measurement value input from the management device and the preset payout rate reference range or the payout rate reference value, and described above. It suffices to display the payout rate suitability information in the same manner as in the embodiment of.

Further, in this case, a management device such as a hall computer 600 calculates a payout rate actual measurement value, and then the calculated payout rate actual measurement value and the corresponding payout rate reference range or payout of the corresponding gaming machine 1 stored in advance. The suitability of the actual measurement value of the payout rate may be determined based on the rate reference value, and the determination result may be output to the gaming device. In this case, when the game device inputs the determination result that the actual measurement value of the payout rate is inappropriate from the management device, the game device may display a message indicating that the payout rate is inappropriate on the display unit. If the same voice message or warning sound is output from the sound output unit, or the light emitting unit emits light in red, the player or the store clerk is notified that the payout rate is inappropriate. good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the payout rate suitability information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming device, but this may be displayed on the display unit 625 of the hall computer 600. By doing so, the store manager can grasp the gaming machine whose payout rate may be inappropriate, and opens the glass door frame 3a of the gaming machine 1 to the store clerk. Instructions can be given to check the display monitor 26.

Further, the hall computer 600 may aggregate the game history of each gaming machine 1 and display the aggregated data on the display unit 625, or acquire the aggregated data of the game history from the data display devices 400 and 1200. , The aggregated data may be displayed on the display unit 625. By doing so, the store manager can grasp the game history of each gaming machine.

Further, the ball management computer 800 may total the number of balls acquired by the player by playing the game on each gaming machine 1, and display the aggregated data on the display unit 830, or the balls acquired from the card unit 300. The aggregated data of the number may be acquired and the aggregated data may be displayed on the display unit 830. By doing so, the manager of the store can grasp the number of acquired balls acquired by the player in the game of each gaming machine.

Further, the gaming system according to the present invention also includes a gaming system including the above-mentioned gaming machines such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine and a gaming point slot machine, and a management device for managing the gaming information of these gaming machines. It is also applicable.

[5-5. Display method]
In the above embodiment, as the display unit included in the data display device 400, a liquid crystal display unit 430 by the liquid crystal display method (first display method) and the seg display unit 440 by the seg display method (second display method) are given as examples. However, the display method of the display unit is not limited to these. For example, an EL display method to which EL (electroluminescence) is applied or a dot display method to which dots are applied may be applied. The combination of these display methods is up to you.

Further, in the data display device 400, by configuring the seg display unit 440 with a large 3-digit 7-segment display, the seg display unit 440 can be easily used by a player who is away from the own device in the store. It was configured to be visible. However, this is only an example, and it is sufficient that the display unit by the second display method can display information by a method having higher visibility from a distance as compared with the first display method. For example, the brightness for displaying information on the second display unit may be higher than the brightness for displaying information on the first display unit. Further, the second display unit is configured so that the viewing angle of the second display unit (the angle at which information can be normally visually recognized when the display unit is viewed from an angle) is wider than the viewing angle of the first display unit. You may.

[5-6. Display mode]
The display mode in the gaming device described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and the settings can be changed as appropriate. For example, the seg display unit 440 of the data display device 400 described in the above embodiment may display various information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 such as the number of big hits, the number of balls held, the number of counts, and the big hit symbol. Although it is possible, the display mode when displaying these information on the seg display unit 440 may be changed. As an example, a case where the number of big hits is displayed will be described.

As described above, the seg display unit 440 is composed of a 3-digit 7-segment display (seg). For example, when the number of big hits is 0, all the segments are lit in rainbow colors. That is, the seg representing the numerical value of 0 corresponding to each digit of the three-digit seg "000" is lit while being sequentially changed by the colors constituting the rainbow. The order and color scheme of the colors for lighting the seg may be the same for each digit, or may be different.

Next, when the number of big hits changes, the seg of the digit unnecessary for displaying the number of big hits is turned off, and the seg of the digit necessary for displaying the number of big hits is turned on in a single color. For example, if the number of big hits is 0 and a big hit occurs in the corresponding gaming machine, the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the three-digit seg that were lit in rainbow colors. Turn off the seg and turn on only the first-ranked seg in a single color. That is, the display of the seg is set to "1" only in the ones digit, and the seg representing the numerical value of 1 is lit in a single color (for example, yellow). The color for lighting the seg may be any color as long as it is a single color. When the number of big hits is 2 digits, the tens and 1s segs are lit in a single color, and when the number of big hits is 3 digits, all the segs are lit in a single color. Just let me do it.

By doing the above, when the number of big hits is 0, the rainbow-colored 3-digit seg can be lit to create a gorgeous illumination-like appearance, which enhances the decorativeness of the gaming device. Can be enhanced. Further, when the number of big hits changes, the number of big hits can be clarified by lighting the seg in a single color of only the necessary digits, and the player can easily confirm the number of big hits.

Further, in the above example, the color for lighting the seg may be changed in a single color according to the number of big hits. For example, if the number of big hits is 1 to 9 times, it is yellow, if it is 10 to 19 times, it is green, and if it is 20 times or more, it is red, and the seg is turned on. May be good. Further, in this case, the color for lighting the seg may be changed in a single color according to the number of consecutive villas in the probable change state. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the appeal effect to the player.

In the above example, when the number of big hits is 0, the 0 seg of all 3 digits is turned on, but only the 0 seg of the 1st place may be turned on. Further, when the number of big hits changes, the unnecessary digit seg is turned off, but the unnecessary digit seg may also be turned on.

In addition, although the case where the number of big hits is displayed in a seg is given here as an example, the same applies to the case where information related to a game other than the number of big hits (number of balls, count number, big hit symbol, etc.) is displayed in a seg. , The description is omitted.

Further, the above example can be similarly applied to any gaming device as long as it is a gaming device provided with a display unit capable of displaying seg. For example, as described above, the above display mode can be similarly applied to a data display device in which a seg display unit (three digits) and a liquid crystal display unit are arranged side by side on the front surface of the housing. It is possible.

[5-7. Standby state]
If the gaming machine has not played a game for a certain period of time or more, it is highly likely that the player is away from his / her seat due to a break or the like. Therefore, in the above embodiment, when the data display device 400 executes a game determination process for determining whether or not a game is being played in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and determines that the game is not being performed, It may be set to the standby state (standby state). In the game determination process, for example, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine signal has been received from the corresponding gaming machine for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes), and if it is determined that the signal has not been received, the game is performed. It can be determined that there is no such thing.

In this case, the data display device 400 reduces the brightness when displaying information on the liquid crystal display unit 430 or the segment display unit 440, hides some of the displayed information, and the like. Then, the own device is controlled to the standby state. Then, when it is determined that the game has started on the corresponding gaming machine 1, the standby state is released and the normal state is controlled. As a result, while the game is not being played on the corresponding gaming machine, the appeal effect to surrounding players and the like can be reduced, and the power consumption can be reduced.

The above settings may be manually performed by the store clerk by performing a setting operation using the setting remote controller, a setting operation for the operation unit of the data display device, or the like.

[5-8. Timekeeping information]
In the above embodiment, the data display device 400 includes the clock unit 470, and the processing unit 410 executes the operation effect based on the timekeeping information output from the clock unit 470. However, instead of doing so, the data display device 400 may execute the operation effect based on a command (a kind of timekeeping information) from a higher-level device such as the hall computer 600.

[5-9. Game device settings]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the gaming device such as the data display device 400 performs various settings based on the setting data provided from the management device such as the hall computer 600. In this case, all the gaming devices installed in the store may be set collectively, the group may be set for each model of the corresponding gaming machine, or the group may be set for each gaming island. Or you may make individual settings one by one. By setting a group for each model or game island, the operation of the game devices installed on the same model or the same game island can be standardized, and the appearance can be improved.

In addition to the above, the game device may set the setting based on the setting signal received from the setting remote controller 700 by the operation of the store manager or the employee, or the setting operation for the operation unit. The game device may make settings based on the acceptance of. Further, the setting data may be stored in the storage unit of the gaming device in advance, and the store employee may perform the setting operation from the operation unit so that the gaming device can perform the setting.

Furthermore, it is possible to download setting information from an external device installed outside the store (for example, a server installed in a card company) using a communication network N such as the Internet, and the downloaded setting information is used. It may be possible for the gaming device to make settings.

Basically, it is desirable that the above-mentioned game device is set by the store employee during non-business such as after the store is closed or before the store is opened. That is, as a mode related to the setting of the game device, the non-business mode may be defined in the program of the device, and the game device may be set in this non-business mode.

[5-10. Opening and closing timing]
In the above embodiment, it is possible to set the execution timing of the motion effect, the mode of the motion effect, and the like on the hall computer 600 side, whether or not the motion effect is executed in the data display device 400. As another example of such a setting on the hall computer 600 side, it may be possible to set the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the door portion 403 of the data display device 400.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing timing setting table in this case.
The opening / closing timing setting table stores the opening / closing timing and the opening / closing mode in association with each other.
In this example, the opening / closing mode "A" is set at the opening / closing timing "at the time of opening", the opening / closing mode "C" is set at the opening / closing timing "13:00", and the opening / closing mode "D" is set at the opening / closing timing "17:00". The opening / closing mode "B" is defined for the opening / closing timing "when the store is closed". By making such a setting for each model of the gaming machine 1 provided corresponding to the data display device 400 or for each gaming island, the door portion 403 of the data display device 400 corresponding to the same model or the same gaming island can be opened and closed. It is possible to align the timing and improve the appearance.

[5-11. Irradiation effect]
In the above embodiment, when the payout rate is determined to be inappropriate, the gaming device may execute the irradiation effect in order to notify the player or the store clerk to that effect. On the contrary, while the payout rate is determined to be appropriate, the irradiation effect as usual is executed, but when the payout rate is determined to be inappropriate, the running irradiation effect is stopped. May be good.

Further, in this case, the irradiation mode in the irradiation effect may be changed based on the payout rate error. Specifically, for example, the illuminance and the emission color are changed according to the payout rate error, and the larger the payout rate error, the higher the illuminance in the irradiation effect, or the emission color in the irradiation effect is "green → yellow →". It may be changed to "red". The irradiation direction and irradiation area of light may be changed.

[5-12. mode]
The irradiation effect mode described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it is needless to say that the setting can be changed as appropriate. In addition to the effect mode, crime prevention mode, and maintenance mode described in the above embodiment, the "special effect mode" when a special effect such as a big hit running effect is executed, or a failure in the corresponding gaming machine or gaming device. Other types of modes such as an "abnormal mode" when an abnormality such as the above occurs, and a "payout rate mode" according to the payout rate as described above may be provided.

Further, as the effect mode, a plurality of effect modes having different irradiation modes may be provided, and as the crime prevention mode, a plurality of crime prevention modes having different body parts (face, hand, etc.) of the player to be irradiated may be provided. A mode may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming device such as the data display devices 400 and 1200 is used as a mode instruction signal output from a management device such as a hall computer 600 or a gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. Based on this, it was described as changing the irradiation mode. In this case, the gaming device may change the irradiation mode based on the number of times the signal is received from these external devices.

Specifically, for example, the management device is configured to output a mode switching signal for switching the mode to the game device. The mode switching signal is, for example, a simple signal of only "ON / OFF", and the gaming device switches the irradiation effect mode according to the number of times the mode switching signal is received from the management device. For example, when the effect mode is set as the initial setting, the mode is switched from the effect mode to the crime prevention mode when the mode switching signal is received once, and the mode is set when the mode switching signal is received twice. You may switch from the production mode to the maintenance mode.

Further, each time the gaming device receives a mode switching signal from the management device, the mode of the irradiation effect may be sequentially switched. For example, when the effect mode is set as the initial setting, the mode is switched from the effect mode to the security mode when the mode switching signal is received for the first time, and the mode switching signal is received for the second time. When the mode is switched from the crime prevention mode to the maintenance mode and the mode switching signal is received for the third time, the mode may be switched from the maintenance mode to the effect mode.

Further, the gaming device may switch the mode based on a signal indicating an abnormality such as a security signal, an error signal, a door opening signal, etc. output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. For example, when a security signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, the mode may be switched from the effect mode to the crime prevention mode.

In addition to these, the game device switches the mode according to the mode switching operation to the operation unit by the store clerk, the reception of the mode switching signal transmitted from the setting remote controller 700, and the like. May be good.

[5-13. Configuration of light emitting part]
In the above embodiment, the light emitting portion in which the frame body in which the light emitting body is enclosed rotates is described as an example, but this is only an example, and it goes without saying that the configuration of the light emitting portion can be appropriately redesigned. Is. For example, instead of rotating the frame body, a light emitting unit capable of rotating the light emitting body enclosed in the frame body may be configured. In addition to this, any conventionally known configuration can be applied to the configuration of the light emitting unit as a movable body.

Further, as in the above embodiment, the light emitting unit does not necessarily have to be configured as a movable body. For example, a light emitting unit composed of a plurality of immovable (fixed) light emitting bodies having directivity is arranged in the data display device 400, and the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting bodies is changed to realize an irradiation effect. You may try to do it.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect of the effect, it is desirable that at least a part of the irradiation area by the plurality of illuminants overlaps as in the above embodiment. Specifically, for example, in the design stage of a gaming device, the light emitters of at least two or more of the light emitters may be positioned so that the irradiation regions overlap each other, or the light emitters of the respective light emitters may be positioned so as to overlap each other. Determine the irradiation direction. Then, after installing the game device in the store, the processing unit of the game device is set according to the setting via the hall computer 600, the setting remote controller 700, or the like, or the setting via the operation unit of the game device. It suffices to select a light emitting body to emit light from a plurality of light emitting bodies and control the light emitting body to emit light.

In addition, it goes without saying that the configuration of the light emitting unit included in the gaming device described in the above embodiment, more specifically, the installation position and the number of LEDs for the irradiation effect can be appropriately changed in design. be.

[5-14. Irradiation target]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that a gaming device such as a data display device 400 or 1200 executes an irradiation effect of irradiating light toward a front region of a corresponding gaming machine. However, in addition to this, the gaming device may perform an irradiation effect of irradiating the corresponding gaming machine itself with light. In this case, the gaming machine itself includes not only the front portion of the housing on which the board surface of the gaming machine is formed, but also the signboard portion configured as a part of the gaming machine in order to notify the player of various information. It is a concept that also includes.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of irradiation effect in this case.
This figure illustrates the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment and the data display device 400 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1. In this figure, a signboard portion is formed as a part of the housing on the right side of the housing of the gaming machine 1 so as to project toward the front side. Information such as model information and store information is displayed on the inner surface (player side surface) of the signboard section.

Further, in this figure, the door portion 403 provided on the right side of the data display device 400 when facing the front is opened inward from the vertical state via the hinge portion 405, and the appeal LED 480e provided at the lower part of the second display area. Light is radiated toward the inner surface of the signboard portion. The angle of the door portion 403 may be adjusted manually by a store clerk or the like, or may be automatically adjusted by the data display device 400. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player playing the game on the gaming machine 1 of various types of information.

Further, the above is an example of irradiating the gaming machine itself with light, but in addition to this, for example, an irradiation effect of irradiating an advertising portion such as an advertisement installed adjacent to the gaming machine at the end of the gaming island with light. May be executed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the irradiation effect in this case.
This figure also illustrates the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment and the data display device 400 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1. In this figure, on the right side of the gaming machine 1 at the end of the gaming island, an advertisement consisting of the model name and specifications of the model installed on the gaming island, images of characters appearing in the model, etc. is displayed. Is installed.

Further, the configuration of the data display device 400 is slightly different from the above embodiment, and in this data display device 400, in addition to the appeal LEDs 480d and 480e on the front surface (outer surface) of the door portion 403, the back surface (inner surface) is used. Two appeal LEDs 480f and two appeal LEDs 480g are formed on the upper part and the lower part of the surface), respectively. Then, in this figure, the door portion 403 provided on the right side of the data display device 400 when facing the front is opened to the outside from the vertical state via the hinge portion 405, and the appeal LED 480 g formed at the lower portion is used as the advertising board. The light is shining toward it. By doing so, it becomes possible to promote various information to the players who come to the store.

In the above, the appeal LED 480f or the appeal LED 480g may be used to irradiate the corresponding gaming machine itself (for example, the board surface) with light. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of production.

Further, a light emitting body such as an LED may be formed on the entire inner surface of the door portion 403 to irradiate the corresponding gaming machine itself (including the signboard portion) or the advertising board with light.

Further, as described above, not only in the example of irradiating light with the LED configured on the inner surface of the door portion 403, but also in any gaming device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, the gaming machine itself (signboard portion). ) Is formed at a position where a light emitting body such as an LED can be irradiated to irradiate light, or a light emitting body such as an LED is formed at a position where an advertising board can be irradiated to irradiate light. good.

Further, the LED configured on the door portion 403 may irradiate not only the corresponding gaming machine but also the surrounding gaming machines and the like with light.

[5-15. Irradiation mode]
The irradiation mode in the irradiation effect described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the design can be changed as appropriate. Irradiation effects based on these irradiation modes are not limited to the irradiation direction and irradiation area of the light emitting unit, but various modes such as the emission color of the light emitting unit, the lighting / blinking pattern of the light emitting unit, and the vibration pattern of the light emitting unit are used as irradiation modes. May be executed.

[5-16. Update display control]
In addition to the information described in the above embodiment, the information that can be updated and displayed and controlled as numerical information in the above embodiment is, for example, the number of stored balls (in the case of a pachinko gaming machine), which is the saved game value saved by the player. Or the number of medals saved (in the case of a slot machine). Further, it may be the balance (prepaid balance or card balance) that is a valuable value that the player has in the gaming card in order to play a game on the gaming machine.

Further, the number of rotations (number of starts) associated with the game on the gaming machine may be used as numerical information. In this case, the addition update display control that increases the number of rotations by one according to the game is executed, but if a big hit or a bonus is won, the number of starts is reset to "0", so that the display is displayed. The subtraction update display control for subtracting the rotation speed to 0 may be executed.

Further, as described above, some slot machines can be controlled to the ART state, and in such slot machines, an additional lottery is performed and the number of games corresponding to the number of winnings is set to the ART state. There are gaming machines that can be added to the number of remaining games in. Therefore, in a slot machine capable of executing such an addition of the number of games, a signal capable of specifying the number of added games (for example, a signal indicating the number of added games) can be externally output in the slot machine. The gaming device may specify the number of added games based on the signal output from the corresponding slot machine, and may update and display control the number of remaining games.

[5-17. Image projection effect]
In addition to the irradiation effect described in the above embodiment, the gaming device may be capable of performing the image projection effect. Specifically, for example, a projector may be built in the gaming device, and the projector may project an image of a character, a reach scene, or the like appearing in the corresponding model of the gaming machine 1.

In this case, the image may be projected toward the front area of the gaming machine, but the image is projected by forming a screen at a predetermined position in the ceiling direction of the store so as not to interfere with the player's game. Alternatively, a screen may be formed on the signboard portion or the partition plate that partitions the gaming machines as described above, and an image may be projected.

The image to be projected may be a still image or a moving image (video). By using the irradiation effect and the image projection effect together, it is possible to further enhance the effect.

[5-18. Relative value]
In the above embodiment, the relative value according to the present invention has been described as the payout rate calculated as the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of outs, but the relative value according to the present invention is not limited to this.

Specifically, a gaming device (information display device) such as a data display device 400, 1200 or a card unit 300 calculates the number of difference balls calculated as the difference between the number of outs and the number of payouts as a relative value. It may be displayed. In this case, the reference relative information according to the present invention may be a reference value (design value) for the number of difference balls or a reference range (design range) for the number of difference balls.

Further, the gaming device may calculate and display the continuous ratio and the winning combination ratio as relative values, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment.

Further, when the gaming device calculates the various relative values described above, a short-term relative value or a cumulative relative value may be calculated as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment. .. For example, when calculating the payout rate, the short-term payout rate (short-term payout rate) or the cumulative payout rate (cumulative payout rate) may be calculated.

[5-19. Specific information]
In the above embodiment, the specific information is described as information such as the payout rate error and the payout rate suitability information, but the specific information is not limited to these, and any information is based on the reference relative information and the measured relative value. Arbitrary information can be specific information. If the relative value is used as the payout rate as in the above embodiment, the payout rate standard information and the actual payout rate value can be compared (for example, the payout rate standard value and the actual payout rate value are displayed side by side). ), Information indicating how much the measured payout rate value deviates from the payout rate reference lower limit value and the payout rate reference upper limit value, and the like may be displayed as specific information.

[5-20. Calculation and display of payout information]
In the above embodiment, the gaming device calculates the payout rate and the payout rate information for both the non-big hit medium and low base state and the non-big hit medium and high base state of the gaming machine 1. It was explained as displaying. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the gaming states may be excluded from the target for which the gaming device calculates the payout rate and displays the payout rate information.

Unlike the high base state, the low base state is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, so that the payout rate in the non-big hit medium and low base state can be said to be noteworthy information for the player. Therefore, for example, the non-big hit medium and high base state may be excluded from the target, and the payout rate may be calculated and the payout rate information may be displayed only for the non-big hit medium and low base state.

[5-21. Types of signals output by gaming machines]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the gaming machine signal is output from the gaming machine 1 to the external device, and the out signal is output to the external device from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1. However, this is not always the case, and a gaming machine equipped with an out switch for detecting a gaming ball that has passed through each winning opening or out opening is configured, and the number of gaming balls detected by the out switch is specified. Every time the number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is reached, one pulse out signal may be output directly from the gaming machine to an external device.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first defined number of balls when the prize ball signal is output from the gaming machine 1 has been described as "10 balls", but it is not always necessary to configure in this way, and the first The specified number of balls may be set to "1 ball". Similarly, for the out signal, the second specified number of balls may be set to "1 ball".

Further, in addition to the types of signals described in the above-described embodiment, the types of signals output from the gaming machine to the external device can be appropriately redesigned.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another example of a signal output by the gaming machine to an external device.
From this gaming machine, two types of signals, a test signal and an information output signal, are configured to be output from an external output board.

The test signal is a signal used for confirming the performance of the gaming machine, and is a signal that enables an external test device in a testing institution to inspect (confirm) the operation and state of the gaming machine.
On the other hand, the information output signal is a signal for notifying an external device of information about the gaming machine.

In this case, the test signal can include, for example, a signal for operating the accessory continuous operation device, a signal for operating the second starting port, and a signal for operating the large winning opening. Further, the information output signal can include a start signal, a prize ball signal, and a security signal.

The accessory continuous operation device is a device that operates when a specific symbol that triggers a transition to a probabilistic state in a gaming machine is won. When the big winning opening is opened by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the gaming machine is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and then to the probable change state. When the large winning opening is opened regardless of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it becomes a so-called small hit and is controlled to the small hit game state.

The accessory continuous actuating device operating signal is a signal that is turned on when the accessory continuous actuating device is in the operating state.
The second starting opening opening signal is a signal that is turned on when the variable winning ball device is normally activated and the second starting winning opening is opened.
The large winning opening operating signal is a signal that is turned on when the special variable winning ball device is activated and the large winning opening is in the open state.

Based on the above test signal, it is possible to standardize the determination of the gaming state of the gaming machine such as the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, the probability variation state, and the time saving state, and to realize a simple determination of the gaming state. .. That is, it can be determined that the gaming machine is in the jackpot gaming state while the continuous operating device operating signal is being received, and the gaming machine is in the probable change state after the reception of the continuous operating device operating signal is completed. Can be determined to be. On the other hand, if the large winning opening operating signal is received without receiving the continuous operating device operating signal, it can be determined that the gaming machine is in the small hit gaming state. Further, while the second start port signal is being received, it can be determined that the gaming machine is in the time saving state.

When the above test signal is applied to the above-described embodiment, the gaming device is based on the test signal, and the gaming machine is in a “non-big hit medium and low base state” and a “non-big hit medium and high base state”. When it is determined which game state it is, and when it is determined to be "non-big hit medium and low base state", the measured value of the low base payout rate is calculated, and when it is determined to be "non-big hit medium and high base state". May calculate the measured value of the high base payout rate.

[5-22. Display of role ratio / consecutive ratio]
In the above embodiment, the combination ratio, the continuous ratio, etc. calculated internally by the game machine 1 with respect to the game devices (information display devices) such as the data display devices 400, 1200 and the card unit 300 from the game machine 1 are related. The information may be configured to be output externally, and the gaming device may display these information input from the gaming machine 1 on the display unit.

[5-23. Display of gaming machines with abnormal payout rates]
In the above embodiment, the gaming device outputs the ID (gaming machine ID) of the gaming machine for which the payout rate is determined to be inappropriate to the hall computer 600, so that the hall computer 600 may have an abnormality. A certain gaming machine 1 can be specified. Therefore, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 displays the gaming machines that have received the gaming machine ID from the gaming device on the display unit 625 in a color-coded manner on the store layout screen showing the arrangement of all the gaming machines in the store. You may let them do it. By doing so, the store manager can at a glance grasp the gaming machine 1 which may have an abnormality.

[5-24. Settings in the management device]
In the above embodiment, the model information of the gaming machine 1 is stored in advance in the hall computer 600, which is a management device, and the payout rate standard information (payout rate standard range and payout rate standard value) is stored based on this model information. It was described as providing to a gaming device. However, instead of doing this, for example, the hall computer 600 enables the model information to be downloaded from the server installed in the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1, so that the gaming machine 1 which becomes a new machine can be stored in the store. The payout rate standard information of this new machine may be downloaded from the manufacturer's server when it is introduced into the machine. Further, at this time, not only the payout rate standard information but also the design information including the external output terminal provided in the gaming machine 1 and the information on the type of the output gaming machine signal may be downloaded from the manufacturer's server. good.

By doing so, the hall computer 600 can manage the method of calculating the payout rate and the method of determining the suitability of the payout rate for each model of the gaming machine.

[5-25. Display of game history and owned game value]
In the second embodiment described above, the data display devices 400 and 1200, which are a type of gaming device, have been described as aggregating the game history information of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and displaying it on the display unit. It may be done by the card unit 300. That is, the card unit 300, which is a kind of gaming device, may aggregate the gaming history information based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and display it on the liquid crystal display 313.

Further, in the above embodiment, the card unit 300, which is a kind of gaming device, aggregates the number of acquired balls acquired by the player by the game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 and displays them on the liquid crystal display 313. As described above, the data display devices 400 and 1200 may perform this. That is, the data display devices 400 and 1200, which are a type of gaming device, may calculate the number of acquired balls based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and display it on the display unit. ..

Further, the game history information of each gaming machine 1 may be displayed on the display unit 625 of the hall computer 600, which is a kind of management device, or the display unit 830 of the ball management computer 800. In this case, the hall computer 600 may acquire the game history information from the data display devices 400 and 1200, or the processing unit 610 may acquire the game history information based on the game machine signal output from each game machine 1. It may be aggregated. Further, the ball management computer 800 may acquire game history information from the hall computer 600.

Further, the number of acquired balls acquired by the player by the game in each gaming machine 1 may be displayed on the display unit 625 of the hall computer 600, which is a kind of management device, or the display unit 830 of the ball management computer 800. .. In this case, the hall computer 600 may acquire the acquired number of balls from the card unit 300, or the processing unit 610 aggregates the acquired number of balls based on the game machine signal output from each gaming machine 1. You may do it. Further, the ball management computer 800 may acquire information on the number of acquired balls from the card unit 300 or the hall computer 600.

[5-26. Game information]
In the above embodiment, the game device has been described as displaying information such as game history information (general game history information, individual game history information, etc.) and the number of acquired balls as game information, but it is displayed as game information. The possible information is not limited to this information.

Depending on the store where the gaming machine is installed, there are stores that allow entry between gaming machines with different rental rates. Taking a pachinko machine as an example, this includes driving from a 4-yen pachinko machine to a 1-yen pachinko machine and from a 1-yen pachinko machine to a 4-yen pachinko machine. Therefore, for example, information regarding the payout of stored balls (or possessed balls) in the gaming machines 1 having different lending rates may be displayed as gaming information.

Specifically, information such as the number and time of times the stored balls are paid out and the number of balls paid out may be displayed as game information. For example, the information is aggregated by a management device such as the ball management computer 800, and the aggregated information is indirectly output from the management device to the gaming device via the unit (card unit or inter-unit counting unit). Or, it may be output directly from the management device to the game device.

Further, in the above embodiment, it has been described that the game device can display two types of game history information, that is, the total game history information and the individual game history information, as the game history information. However, in addition to this, detailed game history information, which is more detailed information of one game history information, may be displayed as game history information.
Specifically, regarding the number of big hits (total, probability variation, normal) included in the game history information, not only the number of big hits on the day but also the number of big hits for the past predetermined period (for example, the past 3 days) is used as detailed game history information. It may be displayed, or as for the payout graph, not only the payout graph for the current day but also the payout graph for each day and the payout graph for each machine may be displayed as detailed game history information.

[5-27. recoding media]
The recording medium possessed by the player and usable for the game on the gaming machine is not limited to the gaming card such as the pachinko card described in the above embodiment. For example, a mobile phone such as a smartphone owned by a player, a tablet terminal, a player terminal such as a PDA, or the like may be used as a recording medium.

Specifically, for example, the reception of a recording medium is that a smartphone, which is an IC-compatible player terminal, is held by an IC reader provided in a gaming device, and the player makes a deposit with electronic money to make a gaming machine. It may be possible to play with. In addition, when the card return button is pressed, the reception cancellation standby state is set, and when the same smartphone as the smartphone being accepted is held by the IC reader in this reception cancellation standby state, the reception of the recording medium is canceled. You may.

1 Pachinko game machine 200 Out-ball detector 250 Mobile terminal 300 Card unit 400 Data display device 500 Inter-unit counting unit 600 Hall computer 700 Setting remote control 800 Ball management computer 900 Terminal 950 Security camera 980 Server 1000 Game system 1200 Data display Device

Claims (2)

It is equipped with a display means that can display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine, can accept start operations and end operations, and can memorize information about the game after accepting the start operation as personal game information. Yes, it is a gaming device that can update personal game information according to the establishment of update conditions according to the game, and can output information that can identify personal game information based on the acceptance of the end operation. hand,
A first processing means capable of executing the first processing based on the start operation,
A second processing means capable of executing the second processing based on the termination operation, and
When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the first process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted, and when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second process, the update of the personal game information is possible. Update limiting means that can limit
Equipped with
Even when the update of personal game information is restricted by the update limiting means, the information to be displayed on the display means can be updated based on the information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine.
A gaming device characterized by this. Information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine can be displayed, start operation and end operation can be accepted, and information about the game after accepting the start operation can be identifiable and stored as personal game information, and the game can be stored. It is a gaming device that can update personal game information according to the establishment of the update condition according to the above, and can output information that can specify personal game information based on the acceptance of the end operation.
A first processing means capable of executing the first processing based on the start operation,
A second processing means capable of executing the second processing based on the termination operation, and
A processing limiting means capable of limiting the processing being executed when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the first processing or the second processing.
A gaming device characterized by being equipped with.

Images